US20180180605A1 - Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers - Google Patents
Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20180180605A1 US20180180605A1 US15/857,427 US201715857427A US2018180605A1 US 20180180605 A1 US20180180605 A1 US 20180180605A1 US 201715857427 A US201715857427 A US 201715857427A US 2018180605 A1 US2018180605 A1 US 2018180605A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- nucleic acid
- electrode
- signal
- monolayer
- probes
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 110
- 239000013545 self-assembled monolayer Substances 0.000 title claims description 36
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 57
- 238000000835 electrochemical detection Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 5
- 150000007523 nucleic acids Chemical class 0.000 claims description 189
- 108020004707 nucleic acids Proteins 0.000 claims description 182
- 102000039446 nucleic acids Human genes 0.000 claims description 182
- 239000000523 sample Substances 0.000 claims description 179
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 claims description 84
- 230000027756 respiratory electron transport chain Effects 0.000 claims description 44
- KTWOOEGAPBSYNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N ferrocene Chemical compound [Fe+2].C=1C=C[CH-]C=1.C=1C=C[CH-]C=1 KTWOOEGAPBSYNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 38
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 claims description 32
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 31
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 claims description 31
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 claims description 30
- 239000002094 self assembled monolayer Substances 0.000 claims description 25
- 230000009871 nonspecific binding Effects 0.000 claims description 12
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 claims description 11
- 238000000018 DNA microarray Methods 0.000 claims description 5
- 238000007667 floating Methods 0.000 claims description 4
- 239000003550 marker Substances 0.000 claims 2
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 abstract description 47
- 239000003446 ligand Substances 0.000 description 135
- 125000005647 linker group Chemical group 0.000 description 105
- 230000027455 binding Effects 0.000 description 77
- 239000012212 insulator Substances 0.000 description 52
- 239000012491 analyte Substances 0.000 description 46
- 238000003556 assay Methods 0.000 description 45
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 44
- 230000007115 recruitment Effects 0.000 description 43
- 108090000623 proteins and genes Proteins 0.000 description 37
- 241000894007 species Species 0.000 description 36
- 239000002777 nucleoside Substances 0.000 description 35
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 33
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 32
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 description 30
- -1 antibodies Proteins 0.000 description 29
- 235000018102 proteins Nutrition 0.000 description 29
- 102000004169 proteins and genes Human genes 0.000 description 29
- IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Atomic nitrogen Chemical compound N#N IJGRMHOSHXDMSA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 26
- 230000003321 amplification Effects 0.000 description 26
- 238000000151 deposition Methods 0.000 description 26
- 230000008021 deposition Effects 0.000 description 26
- 238000009396 hybridization Methods 0.000 description 26
- 238000003199 nucleic acid amplification method Methods 0.000 description 26
- 150000003833 nucleoside derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 26
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 24
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 24
- 229910052723 transition metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 22
- 150000003624 transition metals Chemical class 0.000 description 21
- 108020004414 DNA Proteins 0.000 description 20
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 20
- 229910052717 sulfur Inorganic materials 0.000 description 20
- PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-LMVFSUKVSA-N Ribose Natural products OC[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)C=O PYMYPHUHKUWMLA-LMVFSUKVSA-N 0.000 description 18
- HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-D-Furanose-Ribose Natural products OCC1OC(O)C(O)C1O HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 18
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 description 18
- LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylene glycol Chemical compound OCCO LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 17
- NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfur Chemical compound [S] NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 17
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 17
- 238000004458 analytical method Methods 0.000 description 16
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 16
- 230000000295 complement effect Effects 0.000 description 15
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 15
- 239000011593 sulfur Substances 0.000 description 15
- HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-SOOFDHNKSA-N D-ribofuranose Chemical compound OC[C@H]1OC(O)[C@H](O)[C@@H]1O HMFHBZSHGGEWLO-SOOFDHNKSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 108091093037 Peptide nucleic acid Proteins 0.000 description 14
- 125000003277 amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 14
- QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N atomic oxygen Chemical compound [O] QVGXLLKOCUKJST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 14
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 14
- 229940088598 enzyme Drugs 0.000 description 14
- 125000003729 nucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 14
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 14
- 239000001301 oxygen Substances 0.000 description 14
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 description 14
- 102000004190 Enzymes Human genes 0.000 description 13
- 108090000790 Enzymes Proteins 0.000 description 13
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 13
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 description 13
- 125000003835 nucleoside group Chemical group 0.000 description 13
- 125000002524 organometallic group Chemical group 0.000 description 13
- 238000003752 polymerase chain reaction Methods 0.000 description 13
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 12
- 238000001914 filtration Methods 0.000 description 12
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 150000008300 phosphoramidites Chemical class 0.000 description 12
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 11
- 239000004606 Fillers/Extenders Substances 0.000 description 11
- PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nickel Chemical compound [Ni] PXHVJJICTQNCMI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 11
- 229910019142 PO4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 239000002773 nucleotide Substances 0.000 description 11
- 235000021317 phosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 11
- 229910052707 ruthenium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 11
- 238000012360 testing method Methods 0.000 description 11
- 150000003573 thiols Chemical class 0.000 description 11
- 108700028369 Alleles Proteins 0.000 description 10
- 0 C*C(C)(CC)C(C)(*I)C(C)C Chemical compound C*C(C)(CC)C(C)(*I)C(C)C 0.000 description 10
- KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Palladium Chemical compound [Pd] KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphorus Chemical compound [P] OAICVXFJPJFONN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 10
- 125000000524 functional group Chemical group 0.000 description 10
- 125000005842 heteroatom Chemical group 0.000 description 10
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 10
- 230000035772 mutation Effects 0.000 description 10
- 229910052698 phosphorus Inorganic materials 0.000 description 10
- 239000011574 phosphorus Substances 0.000 description 10
- WEVYAHXRMPXWCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetonitrile Chemical compound CC#N WEVYAHXRMPXWCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- KJTLSVCANCCWHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ruthenium Chemical compound [Ru] KJTLSVCANCCWHF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicon Chemical compound [Si] XUIMIQQOPSSXEZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 239000000370 acceptor Substances 0.000 description 9
- 210000004027 cell Anatomy 0.000 description 9
- 239000003814 drug Substances 0.000 description 9
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 9
- 229910021645 metal ion Inorganic materials 0.000 description 9
- 239000010452 phosphate Substances 0.000 description 9
- BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N platinum Chemical compound [Pt] BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 9
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 9
- XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Iron Chemical compound [Fe] XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 108091034117 Oligonucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 8
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-XVFCMESISA-N Uridine Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-XVFCMESISA-N 0.000 description 8
- PPQRONHOSHZGFQ-LMVFSUKVSA-N aldehydo-D-ribose 5-phosphate Chemical group OP(=O)(O)OC[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)C=O PPQRONHOSHZGFQ-LMVFSUKVSA-N 0.000 description 8
- UYTPUPDQBNUYGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N guanine Chemical compound O=C1NC(N)=NC2=C1N=CN2 UYTPUPDQBNUYGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 125000002887 hydroxy group Chemical group [H]O* 0.000 description 8
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 8
- NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K phosphate Chemical compound [O-]P([O-])([O-])=O NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 8
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 8
- 238000006467 substitution reaction Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000004832 voltammetry Methods 0.000 description 8
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Copper Chemical compound [Cu] RYGMFSIKBFXOCR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyridine Chemical compound C1=CC=NC=C1 JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 241000700605 Viruses Species 0.000 description 7
- 150000001720 carbohydrates Chemical class 0.000 description 7
- 235000014633 carbohydrates Nutrition 0.000 description 7
- 229910017052 cobalt Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 239000010941 cobalt Substances 0.000 description 7
- GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N cobalt atom Chemical compound [Co] GUTLYIVDDKVIGB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 125000004404 heteroalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 7
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 description 7
- 229910052710 silicon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 7
- 239000010703 silicon Substances 0.000 description 7
- 125000004434 sulfur atom Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- ROFVEXUMMXZLPA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Bipyridyl Chemical compound N1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=N1 ROFVEXUMMXZLPA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 108091028043 Nucleic acid sequence Proteins 0.000 description 6
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfuric acid Chemical compound OS(O)(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- DGEZNRSVGBDHLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N [1,10]phenanthroline Chemical compound C1=CN=C2C3=NC=CC=C3C=CC2=C1 DGEZNRSVGBDHLK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 6
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 6
- 239000010949 copper Substances 0.000 description 6
- OPTASPLRGRRNAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N cytosine Chemical compound NC=1C=CNC(=O)N=1 OPTASPLRGRRNAP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 239000003085 diluting agent Substances 0.000 description 6
- 229940079593 drug Drugs 0.000 description 6
- 238000009713 electroplating Methods 0.000 description 6
- 125000000623 heterocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- RAXXELZNTBOGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N imidazole Natural products C1=CNC=N1 RAXXELZNTBOGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 230000001976 improved effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 6
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000000090 biomarker Substances 0.000 description 5
- 125000004432 carbon atom Chemical group C* 0.000 description 5
- 229910052802 copper Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000003205 genotyping method Methods 0.000 description 5
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 5
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 5
- 229910052759 nickel Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 239000003960 organic solvent Substances 0.000 description 5
- 229910052762 osmium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 229910052763 palladium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 5
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 125000006239 protecting group Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 102000005962 receptors Human genes 0.000 description 5
- 108020003175 receptors Proteins 0.000 description 5
- 125000000548 ribosyl group Chemical group C1([C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@H](O1)CO)* 0.000 description 5
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000003595 spectral effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 125000000547 substituted alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 5
- 108091032973 (ribonucleotides)n+m Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 241000894006 Bacteria Species 0.000 description 4
- 229920000742 Cotton Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 201000003883 Cystic fibrosis Diseases 0.000 description 4
- UFWIBTONFRDIAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Naphthalene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC=CC=C21 UFWIBTONFRDIAS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- YNPNZTXNASCQKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phenanthrene Natural products C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3C=CC2=C1 YNPNZTXNASCQKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- WYURNTSHIVDZCO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tetrahydrofuran Chemical compound C1CCOC1 WYURNTSHIVDZCO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 102000011923 Thyrotropin Human genes 0.000 description 4
- 108010061174 Thyrotropin Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- MWPLVEDNUUSJAV-UHFFFAOYSA-N anthracene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC3=CC=CC=C3C=C21 MWPLVEDNUUSJAV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000000427 antigen Substances 0.000 description 4
- 108091007433 antigens Proteins 0.000 description 4
- 102000036639 antigens Human genes 0.000 description 4
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-PSQAKQOGSA-N beta-L-uridine Natural products O[C@H]1[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O[C@@H]1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-PSQAKQOGSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000036755 cellular response Effects 0.000 description 4
- 239000002800 charge carrier Substances 0.000 description 4
- 239000011651 chromium Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000004140 cleaning Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000008094 contradictory effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 230000001419 dependent effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000001077 electron transfer detection Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 4
- KWIUHFFTVRNATP-UHFFFAOYSA-N glycine betaine Chemical compound C[N+](C)(C)CC([O-])=O KWIUHFFTVRNATP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000002209 hydrophobic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N indium;oxotin Chemical compound [In].[Sn]=O AMGQUBHHOARCQH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910052742 iron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- DRAVOWXCEBXPTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N isoguanine Chemical compound NC1=NC(=O)NC2=C1NC=N2 DRAVOWXCEBXPTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910044991 metal oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 150000004706 metal oxides Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 125000004043 oxo group Chemical group O=* 0.000 description 4
- SXADIBFZNXBEGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N phosphoramidous acid Chemical group NP(O)O SXADIBFZNXBEGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229910052697 platinum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 150000004032 porphyrins Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 125000002924 primary amino group Chemical group [H]N([H])* 0.000 description 4
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229910052702 rhenium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 150000003290 ribose derivatives Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 125000001424 substituent group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 230000001225 therapeutic effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- RWQNBRDOKXIBIV-UHFFFAOYSA-N thymine Chemical compound CC1=CNC(=O)NC1=O RWQNBRDOKXIBIV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 239000010936 titanium Substances 0.000 description 4
- DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N uracil arabinoside Natural products OC1C(O)C(CO)OC1N1C(=O)NC(=O)C=C1 DRTQHJPVMGBUCF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229940045145 uridine Drugs 0.000 description 4
- MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-REOHCLBHSA-N (2S)-2-Amino-3-hydroxypropansäure Chemical compound OC[C@H](N)C(O)=O MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 3
- GFFGJBXGBJISGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Adenine Chemical compound NC1=NC=NC2=C1N=CN2 GFFGJBXGBJISGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229930024421 Adenine Natural products 0.000 description 3
- UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Benzene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1 UHOVQNZJYSORNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chromium Chemical compound [Cr] VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 102000004127 Cytokines Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108090000695 Cytokines Proteins 0.000 description 3
- 102000003951 Erythropoietin Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108090000394 Erythropoietin Proteins 0.000 description 3
- VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrochloric acid Chemical compound Cl VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- KDXKERNSBIXSRK-YFKPBYRVSA-N L-lysine Chemical compound NCCCC[C@H](N)C(O)=O KDXKERNSBIXSRK-YFKPBYRVSA-N 0.000 description 3
- KDXKERNSBIXSRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lysine Natural products NCCCCC(N)C(O)=O KDXKERNSBIXSRK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000004472 Lysine Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000012901 Milli-Q water Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000012408 PCR amplification Methods 0.000 description 3
- 102000036693 Thrombopoietin Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108010041111 Thrombopoietin Proteins 0.000 description 3
- RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titanium Chemical compound [Ti] RTAQQCXQSZGOHL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000002835 absorbance Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229960000643 adenine Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 125000003545 alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- HSFWRNGVRCDJHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N alpha-acetylene Natural products C#C HSFWRNGVRCDJHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 125000003368 amide group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 150000001408 amides Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 229940024606 amino acid Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 235000001014 amino acid Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 3
- 210000004369 blood Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 239000008280 blood Substances 0.000 description 3
- 150000001721 carbon Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000003153 chemical reaction reagent Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- ZSWFCLXCOIISFI-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclopentadiene Chemical compound C1C=CC=C1 ZSWFCLXCOIISFI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229940104302 cytosine Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 229940105423 erythropoietin Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 125000002534 ethynyl group Chemical group [H]C#C* 0.000 description 3
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000011152 fibreglass Substances 0.000 description 3
- GVEPBJHOBDJJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N fluoranthrene Natural products C1=CC(C2=CC=CC=C22)=C3C2=CC=CC3=C1 GVEPBJHOBDJJJI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229940088597 hormone Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 239000005556 hormone Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010348 incorporation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 239000003112 inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 3
- 150000002500 ions Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 239000011133 lead Substances 0.000 description 3
- 238000007834 ligase chain reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 235000018977 lysine Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 150000002739 metals Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 125000002496 methyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 3
- 239000013110 organic ligand Substances 0.000 description 3
- SYQBFIAQOQZEGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N osmium atom Chemical compound [Os] SYQBFIAQOQZEGI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000012856 packing Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000010363 phase shift Effects 0.000 description 3
- 150000003003 phosphines Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 229920001308 poly(aminoacid) Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 102000004196 processed proteins & peptides Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 108090000765 processed proteins & peptides Proteins 0.000 description 3
- UMJSCPRVCHMLSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyridine Natural products COC1=CC=CN=C1 UMJSCPRVCHMLSP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000012552 review Methods 0.000 description 3
- WUAPFZMCVAUBPE-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhenium atom Chemical compound [Re] WUAPFZMCVAUBPE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 239000010948 rhodium Substances 0.000 description 3
- 102200128617 rs75961395 Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 102200132108 rs80034486 Human genes 0.000 description 3
- 230000011664 signaling Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000010183 spectrum analysis Methods 0.000 description 3
- 210000001519 tissue Anatomy 0.000 description 3
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- MDAXKAUIABOHTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4,8,11-tetraazacyclotetradecane Chemical compound C1CNCCNCCCNCCNC1 MDAXKAUIABOHTD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DRGAZIDRYFYHIJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2':6',2''-terpyridine Chemical compound N1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC(C=2N=CC=CC=2)=N1 DRGAZIDRYFYHIJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XQCZBXHVTFVIFE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-4-hydroxypyrimidine Chemical compound NC1=NC=CC(O)=N1 XQCZBXHVTFVIFE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LRFVTYWOQMYALW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9H-xanthine Chemical compound O=C1NC(=O)NC2=C1NC=N2 LRFVTYWOQMYALW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000000275 Adrenocorticotropic Hormone Substances 0.000 description 2
- 102100023635 Alpha-fetoprotein Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108091023037 Aptamer Proteins 0.000 description 2
- BPYKTIZUTYGOLE-IFADSCNNSA-N Bilirubin Chemical compound N1C(=O)C(C)=C(C=C)\C1=C\C1=C(C)C(CCC(O)=O)=C(CC2=C(C(C)=C(\C=C/3C(=C(C=C)C(=O)N\3)C)N2)CCC(O)=O)N1 BPYKTIZUTYGOLE-IFADSCNNSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Boron Chemical compound [B] ZOXJGFHDIHLPTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KAKZBPTYRLMSJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Butadiene Chemical compound C=CC=C KAKZBPTYRLMSJV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102100025475 Carcinoembryonic antigen-related cell adhesion molecule 5 Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 102000000844 Cell Surface Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010001857 Cell Surface Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000011022 Chorionic Gonadotropin Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010062540 Chorionic Gonadotropin Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102400000739 Corticotropin Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 101800000414 Corticotropin Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 239000004971 Cross linker Substances 0.000 description 2
- RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N Diethyl ether Chemical compound CCOCC RTZKZFJDLAIYFH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 241000709661 Enterovirus Species 0.000 description 2
- VGGSQFUCUMXWEO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethene Chemical compound C=C VGGSQFUCUMXWEO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000005977 Ethylene Substances 0.000 description 2
- 102000012673 Follicle Stimulating Hormone Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108010079345 Follicle Stimulating Hormone Proteins 0.000 description 2
- ZHNUHDYFZUAESO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Formamide Chemical compound NC=O ZHNUHDYFZUAESO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 101000914324 Homo sapiens Carcinoembryonic antigen-related cell adhesion molecule 5 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 101000914321 Homo sapiens Carcinoembryonic antigen-related cell adhesion molecule 7 Proteins 0.000 description 2
- MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen peroxide Chemical compound OO MHAJPDPJQMAIIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 108090000723 Insulin-Like Growth Factor I Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 108090001090 Lectins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 102000004856 Lectins Human genes 0.000 description 2
- ZMXDDKWLCZADIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N N,N-Dimethylformamide Chemical compound CN(C)C=O ZMXDDKWLCZADIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010028980 Neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 108020004711 Nucleic Acid Probes Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 206010061902 Pancreatic neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- PCNDJXKNXGMECE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phenazine Natural products C1=CC=CC2=NC3=CC=CC=C3N=C21 PCNDJXKNXGMECE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 206010060862 Prostate cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000000236 Prostatic Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 2
- KYQCOXFCLRTKLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrazine Chemical compound C1=CN=CC=N1 KYQCOXFCLRTKLS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- AUNGANRZJHBGPY-SCRDCRAPSA-N Riboflavin Chemical compound OC[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@@H](O)CN1C=2C=C(C)C(C)=CC=2N=C2C1=NC(=O)NC2=O AUNGANRZJHBGPY-SCRDCRAPSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000000692 Student's t-test Methods 0.000 description 2
- PPBRXRYQALVLMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Styrene Chemical compound C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 PPBRXRYQALVLMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- MUMGGOZAMZWBJJ-DYKIIFRCSA-N Testostosterone Chemical compound O=C1CC[C@]2(C)[C@H]3CC[C@](C)([C@H](CC4)O)[C@@H]4[C@@H]3CCC2=C1 MUMGGOZAMZWBJJ-DYKIIFRCSA-N 0.000 description 2
- YTPLMLYBLZKORZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Thiophene Chemical compound C=1C=CSC=1 YTPLMLYBLZKORZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 102000003978 Tissue Plasminogen Activator Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108090000373 Tissue Plasminogen Activator Proteins 0.000 description 2
- ISAKRJDGNUQOIC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Uracil Chemical compound O=C1C=CNC(=O)N1 ISAKRJDGNUQOIC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NIJJYAXOARWZEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Valproic acid Chemical compound CCCC(C(O)=O)CCC NIJJYAXOARWZEE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- HXGDTGSAIMULJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N acenaphthylene Chemical compound C1=CC(C=C2)=C3C2=CC=CC3=C1 HXGDTGSAIMULJN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000001298 alcohols Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000001299 aldehydes Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 108010026331 alpha-Fetoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N aluminium Chemical compound [Al] XAGFODPZIPBFFR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000004082 amperometric method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000003242 anti bacterial agent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000000692 anti-sense effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229940088710 antibiotic agent Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 2
- QZPSXPBJTPJTSZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N aqua regia Chemical compound Cl.O[N+]([O-])=O QZPSXPBJTPJTSZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000001580 bacterial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229960003237 betaine Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000004305 biphenyl Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052796 boron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052793 cadmium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- BDOSMKKIYDKNTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N cadmium atom Chemical compound [Cd] BDOSMKKIYDKNTQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 201000011510 cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- SKOLWUPSYHWYAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N carbonodithioic O,S-acid Chemical class SC(S)=O SKOLWUPSYHWYAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000003178 carboxy group Chemical group [H]OC(*)=O 0.000 description 2
- 230000001413 cellular effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000919 ceramic Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000001311 chemical methods and process Methods 0.000 description 2
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 description 2
- HVYWMOMLDIMFJA-DPAQBDIFSA-N cholesterol Chemical compound C1C=C2C[C@@H](O)CC[C@]2(C)[C@@H]2[C@@H]1[C@@H]1CC[C@H]([C@H](C)CCCC(C)C)[C@@]1(C)CC2 HVYWMOMLDIMFJA-DPAQBDIFSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000004769 chrono-potentiometry Methods 0.000 description 2
- WDECIBYCCFPHNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N chrysene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC2=CC=C3C4=CC=CC=C4C=CC3=C21 WDECIBYCCFPHNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZPUCINDJVBIVPJ-LJISPDSOSA-N cocaine Chemical compound O([C@H]1C[C@@H]2CC[C@@H](N2C)[C@H]1C(=O)OC)C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 ZPUCINDJVBIVPJ-LJISPDSOSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000002299 complementary DNA Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000004020 conductor Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000013068 control sample Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011889 copper foil Substances 0.000 description 2
- VPUGDVKSAQVFFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N coronene Chemical compound C1=C(C2=C34)C=CC3=CC=C(C=C3)C4=C4C3=CC=C(C=C3)C4=C2C3=C1 VPUGDVKSAQVFFS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- IDLFZVILOHSSID-OVLDLUHVSA-N corticotropin Chemical compound C([C@@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCSC)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1NC=NC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](C(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CO)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 IDLFZVILOHSSID-OVLDLUHVSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229960000258 corticotropin Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- DMSZORWOGDLWGN-UHFFFAOYSA-N ctk1a3526 Chemical compound NP(N)(N)=O DMSZORWOGDLWGN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000001934 delay Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000412 dendrimer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920000736 dendritic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000003599 detergent Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 2
- BVQAWSJMUYMNQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N dipyridophenazine Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C3=NC4=CC=CC=C4N=C3C3=CC=CN=C3C2=N1 BVQAWSJMUYMNQN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 150000002019 disulfides Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000005518 electrochemistry Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002708 enhancing effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000003344 environmental pollutant Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000005530 etching Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229940028334 follicle stimulating hormone Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 239000012634 fragment Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000007789 gas Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910021397 glassy carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910052736 halogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000002367 halogens Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229940084986 human chorionic gonadotropin Drugs 0.000 description 2
- JYGXADMDTFJGBT-VWUMJDOOSA-N hydrocortisone Chemical compound O=C1CC[C@]2(C)[C@H]3[C@@H](O)C[C@](C)([C@@](CC4)(O)C(=O)CO)[C@@H]4[C@@H]3CCC2=C1 JYGXADMDTFJGBT-VWUMJDOOSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FDGQSTZJBFJUBT-UHFFFAOYSA-N hypoxanthine Chemical compound O=C1NC=NC2=C1NC=N2 FDGQSTZJBFJUBT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000007654 immersion Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000011534 incubation Methods 0.000 description 2
- NOESYZHRGYRDHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N insulin Chemical compound N1C(=O)C(NC(=O)C(CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)C(CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)CN)C(C)CC)CSSCC(C(NC(CO)C(=O)NC(CC(C)C)C(=O)NC(CC=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)C(=O)NC(CCC(N)=O)C(=O)NC(CC(C)C)C(=O)NC(CCC(O)=O)C(=O)NC(CC(N)=O)C(=O)NC(CC=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)C(=O)NC(CSSCC(NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC=2C=CC(O)=CC=2)NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(C)NC(=O)C(CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)C(C(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(CC=2NC=NC=2)NC(=O)C(CO)NC(=O)CNC2=O)C(=O)NCC(=O)NC(CCC(O)=O)C(=O)NC(CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)NCC(=O)NC(CC=3C=CC=CC=3)C(=O)NC(CC=3C=CC=CC=3)C(=O)NC(CC=3C=CC(O)=CC=3)C(=O)NC(C(C)O)C(=O)N3C(CCC3)C(=O)NC(CCCCN)C(=O)NC(C)C(O)=O)C(=O)NC(CC(N)=O)C(O)=O)=O)NC(=O)C(C(C)CC)NC(=O)C(CO)NC(=O)C(C(C)O)NC(=O)C1CSSCC2NC(=O)C(CC(C)C)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)C(CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)C(CC(N)=O)NC(=O)C(NC(=O)C(N)CC=1C=CC=CC=1)C(C)C)CC1=CN=CN1 NOESYZHRGYRDHS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000009830 intercalation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910052741 iridium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000002523 lectin Substances 0.000 description 2
- 208000015486 malignant pancreatic neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 239000011572 manganese Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 2
- 108020004999 messenger RNA Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 150000002736 metal compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- CXKWCBBOMKCUKX-UHFFFAOYSA-M methylene blue Chemical compound [Cl-].C1=CC(N(C)C)=CC2=[S+]C3=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C3N=C21 CXKWCBBOMKCUKX-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 229960000907 methylthioninium chloride Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 229910052750 molybdenum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229910000476 molybdenum oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000007935 neutral effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 125000000449 nitro group Chemical group [O-][N+](*)=O 0.000 description 2
- 102000044158 nucleic acid binding protein Human genes 0.000 description 2
- 108700020942 nucleic acid binding protein Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 239000002853 nucleic acid probe Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000001668 nucleic acid synthesis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000002902 organometallic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000003647 oxidation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000007254 oxidation reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 201000002528 pancreatic cancer Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 208000008443 pancreatic carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 2
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000001717 pathogenic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000013610 patient sample Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000005041 phenanthrolines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000002467 phosphate group Chemical group [H]OP(=O)(O[H])O[*] 0.000 description 2
- 150000003013 phosphoric acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229910003446 platinum oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 2
- OXCMYAYHXIHQOA-UHFFFAOYSA-N potassium;[2-butyl-5-chloro-3-[[4-[2-(1,2,4-triaza-3-azanidacyclopenta-1,4-dien-5-yl)phenyl]phenyl]methyl]imidazol-4-yl]methanol Chemical compound [K+].CCCCC1=NC(Cl)=C(CO)N1CC1=CC=C(C=2C(=CC=CC=2)C2=N[N-]N=N2)C=C1 OXCMYAYHXIHQOA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000003672 processing method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 125000001436 propyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 2
- ZCCUUQDIBDJBTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N psoralen Chemical compound C1=C2OC(=O)C=CC2=CC2=C1OC=C2 ZCCUUQDIBDJBTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BBEAQIROQSPTKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyrene Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C=CC3=CC=CC4=CC=C1C2=C43 BBEAQIROQSPTKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000008521 reorganization Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000010076 replication Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910052703 rhodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 239000012488 sample solution Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229910052814 silicon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 150000003384 small molecules Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229940124530 sulfonamide Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 150000003456 sulfonamides Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 238000012353 t test Methods 0.000 description 2
- 229910052713 technetium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- YLQBMQCUIZJEEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrahydrofuran Natural products C=1C=COC=1 YLQBMQCUIZJEEH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZFXYFBGIUFBOJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N theophylline Chemical compound O=C1N(C)C(=O)N(C)C2=C1NC=N2 ZFXYFBGIUFBOJW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 125000003396 thiol group Chemical group [H]S* 0.000 description 2
- 229940113082 thymine Drugs 0.000 description 2
- 229960000187 tissue plasminogen activator Drugs 0.000 description 2
- WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten Chemical compound [W] WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000010937 tungsten Substances 0.000 description 2
- 241000701161 unidentified adenovirus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241001529453 unidentified herpesvirus Species 0.000 description 2
- 241001430294 unidentified retrovirus Species 0.000 description 2
- VBEQCZHXXJYVRD-GACYYNSASA-N uroanthelone Chemical compound C([C@@H](C(=O)N[C@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CS)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CS)C(=O)N[C@H](C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)CC)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CS)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(O)=O)C(C)C)[C@@H](C)O)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1NC=NC=1)NC(=O)[C@H](CCSC)NC(=O)[C@H](CS)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)CNC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H](CC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CS)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H]1N(CCC1)C(=O)[C@H](CS)NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H]1N(CCC1)C(=O)[C@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC(N)=O)C(C)C)[C@@H](C)CC)C1=CC=C(O)C=C1 VBEQCZHXXJYVRD-GACYYNSASA-N 0.000 description 2
- 238000010200 validation analysis Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000003612 virological effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000009736 wetting Methods 0.000 description 2
- YUFFSWGQGVEMMI-JLNKQSITSA-N (7Z,10Z,13Z,16Z,19Z)-docosapentaenoic acid Chemical compound CC\C=C/C\C=C/C\C=C/C\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCCC(O)=O YUFFSWGQGVEMMI-JLNKQSITSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910018861 (C5H5)2Fe Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- KWTSXDURSIMDCE-QMMMGPOBSA-N (S)-amphetamine Chemical compound C[C@H](N)CC1=CC=CC=C1 KWTSXDURSIMDCE-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003088 (fluoren-9-ylmethoxy)carbonyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- VOXZDWNPVJITMN-ZBRFXRBCSA-N 17β-estradiol Chemical compound OC1=CC=C2[C@H]3CC[C@](C)([C@H](CC4)O)[C@@H]4[C@@H]3CCC2=C1 VOXZDWNPVJITMN-ZBRFXRBCSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VEPOHXYIFQMVHW-XOZOLZJESA-N 2,3-dihydroxybutanedioic acid (2S,3S)-3,4-dimethyl-2-phenylmorpholine Chemical compound OC(C(O)C(O)=O)C(O)=O.C[C@H]1[C@@H](OCCN1C)c1ccccc1 VEPOHXYIFQMVHW-XOZOLZJESA-N 0.000 description 1
- JFJNVIPVOCESGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,3-dipyridin-2-ylpyridine Chemical class N1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CN=C1C1=CC=CC=N1 JFJNVIPVOCESGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CCBICDLNWJRFPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,6-dichloroindophenol Chemical compound C1=CC(O)=CC=C1N=C1C=C(Cl)C(=O)C(Cl)=C1 CCBICDLNWJRFPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QKNYBSVHEMOAJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-amino-2-(hydroxymethyl)propane-1,3-diol;hydron;chloride Chemical compound Cl.OCC(N)(CO)CO QKNYBSVHEMOAJP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OZDAOHVKBFBBMZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-aminopentanedioic acid;hydrate Chemical compound O.OC(=O)C(N)CCC(O)=O OZDAOHVKBFBBMZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UWRZIZXBOLBCON-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-phenylethenamine Chemical compound NC=CC1=CC=CC=C1 UWRZIZXBOLBCON-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000003903 2-propenyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])([H])C([H])=C([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- VXGRJERITKFWPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4',5'-Dihydropsoralen Natural products C1=C2OC(=O)C=CC2=CC2=C1OCC2 VXGRJERITKFWPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JIVLDFFWTQYGSR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4,7-dimethyl-[1,10]phenanthroline Chemical compound C1=CC2=C(C)C=CN=C2C2=C1C(C)=CC=N2 JIVLDFFWTQYGSR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OXMSMRJQZMTIMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-phenyl-2-(4-phenylpyridin-2-yl)pyridine Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=NC(C=2N=CC=C(C=2)C=2C=CC=CC=2)=C1 OXMSMRJQZMTIMT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NMTUJCMONVTLHN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7-ethyl-10-methylbenzo[a]phenazin-7-ium-5-amine;chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].C1=C(N)C2=CC=CC=C2C2=C1[N+](CC)=C(C=CC(C)=C1)C1=N2 NMTUJCMONVTLHN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LUBXLGUQZVKOFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-phenylanthracene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1=C(C=CC=C2)C2=CC2=CC=CC=C12 LUBXLGUQZVKOFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108010088751 Albumins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000009027 Albumins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 239000004382 Amylase Substances 0.000 description 1
- 102000013142 Amylases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010065511 Amylases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100029470 Apolipoprotein E Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101710095339 Apolipoprotein E Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000007592 Apolipoproteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010071619 Apolipoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000712891 Arenavirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241001120493 Arene Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000004625 Aspartate Aminotransferases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010003415 Aspartate Aminotransferases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000012935 Averaging Methods 0.000 description 1
- 241000193830 Bacillus <bacterium> Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000588807 Bordetella Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000588832 Bordetella pertussis Species 0.000 description 1
- 206010006187 Breast cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000026310 Breast neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 1
- WKBOTKDWSSQWDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Bromine atom Chemical compound [Br] WKBOTKDWSSQWDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DYJKHXXOTXRPIV-NMWFTTQASA-N C.C.C.C.C.C.C.C.CCC(C)C(C)(N[Y]B[2H][Y]C)C(C)C.CCC(C)C(C)(O[SiH2][Y]B[2H][Y]C)C(C)C Chemical compound C.C.C.C.C.C.C.C.CCC(C)C(C)(N[Y]B[2H][Y]C)C(C)C.CCC(C)C(C)(O[SiH2][Y]B[2H][Y]C)C(C)C DYJKHXXOTXRPIV-NMWFTTQASA-N 0.000 description 1
- CHBNJCHUZUYYFQ-UMMGPYKBSA-M C.C.C.C.CCC(C)C(C)(S[Y]B[2H][Y]C)C(C)C Chemical compound C.C.C.C.CCC(C)C(C)(S[Y]B[2H][Y]C)C(C)C CHBNJCHUZUYYFQ-UMMGPYKBSA-M 0.000 description 1
- HDMHHMFLRAYWBU-UHFFFAOYSA-N C=CCNP(OCCCOC)C(C(C)C)C(C)C Chemical compound C=CCNP(OCCCOC)C(C(C)C)C(C)C HDMHHMFLRAYWBU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WFRJWYKMJXLFOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N CC(C1C)C(C)OC1N(C=C(C(N1)=O)C#CI)C1=O Chemical compound CC(C1C)C(C)OC1N(C=C(C(N1)=O)C#CI)C1=O WFRJWYKMJXLFOI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UVJPLEYMJTYLJL-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCCC#CC1=CN(C2OC(C)C(C)C2C)C(=O)NC1=O Chemical compound CCCC#CC1=CN(C2OC(C)C(C)C2C)C(=O)NC1=O UVJPLEYMJTYLJL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RRSWGWRDJAQZBX-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCCC(=O)NC1C(C)OC(C)C1C Chemical compound CCCC(=O)NC1C(C)OC(C)C1C RRSWGWRDJAQZBX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NZIGKAFOBBYYOK-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCFC(C)(C(C)C)C(C)CC Chemical compound CCFC(C)(C(C)C)C(C)CC NZIGKAFOBBYYOK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AOHVVAIDNQGYDC-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCNC1C(C)OC(C)C1C Chemical compound CCNC1C(C)OC(C)C1C AOHVVAIDNQGYDC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VLFZBFUYGCVAKM-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCOC1C(C)OC(C)C1C Chemical compound CCOC1C(C)OC(C)C1C VLFZBFUYGCVAKM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OIPYPQHFBOLNIR-UHFFFAOYSA-N CCOP(=O)(OC)OC1C(C)OC(C)C1C Chemical compound CCOP(=O)(OC)OC1C(C)OC(C)C1C OIPYPQHFBOLNIR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000055006 Calcitonin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108060001064 Calcitonin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- CURLTUGMZLYLDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon dioxide Chemical compound O=C=O CURLTUGMZLYLDI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 201000009030 Carcinoma Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000252506 Characiformes Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000606161 Chlamydia Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000606153 Chlamydia trachomatis Species 0.000 description 1
- VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-M Chloride anion Chemical compound [Cl-] VEXZGXHMUGYJMC-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chlorine atom Chemical compound [Cl] ZAMOUSCENKQFHK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000003914 Cholinesterases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000322 Cholinesterases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108090000317 Chymotrypsin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010005939 Ciliary Neurotrophic Factor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000016989 Ciliary Neurotrophic Factor Receptor Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010000063 Ciliary Neurotrophic Factor Receptor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100031614 Ciliary neurotrophic factor Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 241000193163 Clostridioides difficile Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000193403 Clostridium Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000193155 Clostridium botulinum Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000193468 Clostridium perfringens Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000193449 Clostridium tetani Species 0.000 description 1
- 206010009944 Colon cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 208000001333 Colorectal Neoplasms Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000711573 Coronaviridae Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000186227 Corynebacterium diphtheriae Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000709687 Coxsackievirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000004420 Creatine Kinase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010042126 Creatine kinase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- XFXPMWWXUTWYJX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cyanide Chemical compound N#[C-] XFXPMWWXUTWYJX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000701022 Cytomegalovirus Species 0.000 description 1
- AUNGANRZJHBGPY-UHFFFAOYSA-N D-Lyxoflavin Natural products OCC(O)C(O)C(O)CN1C=2C=C(C)C(C)=CC=2N=C2C1=NC(=O)NC2=O AUNGANRZJHBGPY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000008574 D-amino acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 102100033215 DNA nucleotidylexotransferase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010008286 DNA nucleotidylexotransferase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920002307 Dextran Polymers 0.000 description 1
- LTMHDMANZUZIPE-AMTYYWEZSA-N Digoxin Natural products O([C@H]1[C@H](C)O[C@H](O[C@@H]2C[C@@H]3[C@@](C)([C@@H]4[C@H]([C@]5(O)[C@](C)([C@H](O)C4)[C@H](C4=CC(=O)OC4)CC5)CC3)CC2)C[C@@H]1O)[C@H]1O[C@H](C)[C@@H](O[C@H]2O[C@@H](C)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)C2)[C@@H](O)C1 LTMHDMANZUZIPE-AMTYYWEZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N EDTA Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O KCXVZYZYPLLWCC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000001301 EGF receptor Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108060006698 EGF receptor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000991587 Enterovirus C Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000588722 Escherichia Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000588724 Escherichia coli Species 0.000 description 1
- 108060002716 Exonuclease Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000008946 Fibrinogen Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010049003 Fibrinogen Proteins 0.000 description 1
- PXGOKWXKJXAPGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Fluorine Chemical compound FF PXGOKWXKJXAPGV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000001390 Fructose-Bisphosphate Aldolase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010068561 Fructose-Bisphosphate Aldolase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241001556449 Garrha rubella Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000224467 Giardia intestinalis Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000042092 Glucose transporter family Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091052347 Glucose transporter family Proteins 0.000 description 1
- WHUUTDBJXJRKMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glutamic acid Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CCC(O)=O WHUUTDBJXJRKMK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229930186217 Glycolipid Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 102000003886 Glycoproteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000288 Glycoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241001123589 Gorilla papillomavirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 108010051696 Growth Hormone Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100020948 Growth hormone receptor Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010010234 HDL Lipoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000015779 HDL Lipoproteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010010369 HIV Protease Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000606790 Haemophilus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000606768 Haemophilus influenzae Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000008100 Human Serum Albumin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108091006905 Human Serum Albumin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010020460 Human T-cell lymphotropic virus type I infection Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000714260 Human T-lymphotropic virus 1 Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000714259 Human T-lymphotropic virus 2 Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000701085 Human alphaherpesvirus 3 Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000701044 Human gammaherpesvirus 4 Species 0.000 description 1
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UGQMRVRMYYASKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hypoxanthine nucleoside Natural products OC1C(O)C(CO)OC1N1C(NC=NC2=O)=C2N=C1 UGQMRVRMYYASKQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108060003951 Immunoglobulin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- UGQMRVRMYYASKQ-KQYNXXCUSA-N Inosine Chemical compound O[C@@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](CO)O[C@H]1N1C2=NC=NC(O)=C2N=C1 UGQMRVRMYYASKQ-KQYNXXCUSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229930010555 Inosine Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 108090001061 Insulin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004877 Insulin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000004218 Insulin-Like Growth Factor I Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000000589 Interleukin-1 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010002352 Interleukin-1 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000019223 Interleukin-1 receptor Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108050006617 Interleukin-1 receptor Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004553 Interleukin-11 Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010017521 Interleukin-11 Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004560 Interleukin-12 Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010017515 Interleukin-12 Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004559 Interleukin-13 Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010017511 Interleukin-13 Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004556 Interleukin-15 Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010017535 Interleukin-15 Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000013691 Interleukin-17 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108050003558 Interleukin-17 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004554 Interleukin-17 Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010017525 Interleukin-17 Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000010789 Interleukin-2 Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010038453 Interleukin-2 Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000010790 Interleukin-3 Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010038452 Interleukin-3 Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000010787 Interleukin-4 Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010038486 Interleukin-4 Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000010786 Interleukin-5 Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010038484 Interleukin-5 Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000010781 Interleukin-6 Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010038501 Interleukin-6 Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000010782 Interleukin-7 Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010038498 Interleukin-7 Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000010682 Interleukin-9 Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010038414 Interleukin-9 Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000015696 Interleukins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010063738 Interleukins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229910021577 Iron(II) chloride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-REOHCLBHSA-N L-alanine Chemical compound C[C@H](N)C(O)=O QNAYBMKLOCPYGJ-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000008575 L-amino acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-REOHCLBHSA-N L-aspartic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC(O)=O CKLJMWTZIZZHCS-REOHCLBHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000003855 L-lactate dehydrogenase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108700023483 L-lactate dehydrogenases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- COLNVLDHVKWLRT-QMMMGPOBSA-N L-phenylalanine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=CC=C1 COLNVLDHVKWLRT-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QIVBCDIJIAJPQS-VIFPVBQESA-N L-tryptophane Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(C[C@H](N)C(O)=O)=CNC2=C1 QIVBCDIJIAJPQS-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- OUYCCCASQSFEME-QMMMGPOBSA-N L-tyrosine Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 OUYCCCASQSFEME-QMMMGPOBSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000007330 LDL Lipoproteins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010007622 LDL Lipoproteins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010001831 LDL receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000000853 LDL receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 241000713666 Lentivirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000016267 Leptin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010092277 Leptin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- NNJVILVZKWQKPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Lidocaine Chemical compound CCN(CC)CC(=O)NC1=C(C)C=CC=C1C NNJVILVZKWQKPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005684 Liebig rearrangement reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 102000003960 Ligases Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000364 Ligases Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004882 Lipase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090001060 Lipase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000004367 Lipase Substances 0.000 description 1
- PWHULOQIROXLJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Manganese Chemical compound [Mn] PWHULOQIROXLJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000712079 Measles morbillivirus Species 0.000 description 1
- ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Molybdenum Chemical compound [Mo] ZOKXTWBITQBERF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000711386 Mumps virus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000186359 Mycobacterium Species 0.000 description 1
- 102100030856 Myoglobin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010062374 Myoglobin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000588653 Neisseria Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000588652 Neisseria gonorrhoeae Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000588650 Neisseria meningitidis Species 0.000 description 1
- GRYLNZFGIOXLOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Nitric acid Chemical compound O[N+]([O-])=O GRYLNZFGIOXLOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000714209 Norwalk virus Species 0.000 description 1
- 101710163270 Nuclease Proteins 0.000 description 1
- JSAWYMYUJKVZGE-UHFFFAOYSA-N Oc1c([nH]c2c(cc(cc12)S(O)(=O)=O)S(O)(=O)=O)C1=Nc2c(cc(cc2S(O)(=O)=O)S(O)(=O)=O)C1=O Chemical compound Oc1c([nH]c2c(cc(cc12)S(O)(=O)=O)S(O)(=O)=O)C1=Nc2c(cc(cc2S(O)(=O)=O)S(O)(=O)=O)C1=O JSAWYMYUJKVZGE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000043276 Oncogene Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108700020796 Oncogene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000150452 Orthohantavirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000702244 Orthoreovirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 238000005052 Osteryoung square wave voltammetry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 206010033128 Ovarian cancer Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010061535 Ovarian neoplasm Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 108091008606 PDGF receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 208000016222 Pancreatic disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 241000709664 Picornaviridae Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000011653 Platelet-Derived Growth Factor Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 229920000805 Polyaspartic acid Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004698 Polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000002202 Polyethylene glycol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 108010020346 Polyglutamic Acid Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010039918 Polylysine Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241001505332 Polyomavirus sp. Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000004743 Polypropylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004793 Polystyrene Substances 0.000 description 1
- 102000003946 Prolactin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010057464 Prolactin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010002519 Prolactin Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102100029000 Prolactin receptor Human genes 0.000 description 1
- ONIBWKKTOPOVIA-UHFFFAOYSA-N Proline Natural products OC(=O)C1CCCN1 ONIBWKKTOPOVIA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102100035703 Prostatic acid phosphatase Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 241000125945 Protoparvovirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000589516 Pseudomonas Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000589776 Pseudomonas putida Species 0.000 description 1
- KAESVJOAVNADME-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyrrole Chemical compound C=1C=CNC=1 KAESVJOAVNADME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000711798 Rabies lyssavirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000725643 Respiratory syncytial virus Species 0.000 description 1
- 108091028664 Ribonucleotide Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000702670 Rotavirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 108091006300 SLC2A4 Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000607142 Salmonella Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000293871 Salmonella enterica subsp. enterica serovar Typhi Species 0.000 description 1
- BUGBHKTXTAQXES-UHFFFAOYSA-N Selenium Chemical compound [Se] BUGBHKTXTAQXES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Serine Natural products OCC(N)C(O)=O MTCFGRXMJLQNBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000607768 Shigella Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000607764 Shigella dysenteriae Species 0.000 description 1
- BLRPTPMANUNPDV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silane Chemical group [SiH4] BLRPTPMANUNPDV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silicium dioxide Chemical compound O=[Si]=O VYPSYNLAJGMNEJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910021607 Silver chloride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 241000580858 Simian-Human immunodeficiency virus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000700584 Simplexvirus Species 0.000 description 1
- 102100033939 Solute carrier family 2, facilitated glucose transporter member 4 Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000013275 Somatomedins Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102100038803 Somatotropin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010068542 Somatotropin Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000191940 Staphylococcus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000194017 Streptococcus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000193996 Streptococcus pyogenes Species 0.000 description 1
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-L Sulfate Chemical compound [O-]S([O-])(=O)=O QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 108091008874 T cell receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000016266 T-Cell Antigen Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 241000718007 Taenionema palladium Species 0.000 description 1
- 239000004809 Teflon Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920006362 Teflon® Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 108090000190 Thrombin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titan oxide Chemical compound O=[Ti]=O GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 102000004338 Transferrin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090000901 Transferrin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108010033576 Transferrin Receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000007238 Transferrin Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000009618 Transforming Growth Factors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010009583 Transforming Growth Factors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102400001320 Transforming growth factor alpha Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 101800004564 Transforming growth factor alpha Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000589886 Treponema Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000004987 Troponin T Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108090001108 Troponin T Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 108090000631 Trypsin Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004142 Trypsin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- QIVBCDIJIAJPQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tryptophan Natural products C1=CC=C2C(CC(N)C(O)=O)=CNC2=C1 QIVBCDIJIAJPQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108091008605 VEGF receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000700618 Vaccinia virus Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000700647 Variola virus Species 0.000 description 1
- 102000009484 Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor Receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 102000005789 Vascular Endothelial Growth Factors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010019530 Vascular Endothelial Growth Factors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 241000607598 Vibrio Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000607626 Vibrio cholerae Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000607734 Yersinia <bacteria> Species 0.000 description 1
- 241000607479 Yersinia pestis Species 0.000 description 1
- JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N [3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-[[5-(2-amino-6-oxo-1H-purin-9-yl)-3-hydroxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxyoxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(5-methyl-2,4-dioxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methoxy-hydroxyphosphoryl]oxy-5-(4-amino-2-oxopyrimidin-1-yl)oxolan-2-yl]methyl [5-(6-aminopurin-9-yl)-2-(hydroxymethyl)oxolan-3-yl] hydrogen phosphate Polymers Cc1cn(C2CC(OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3OP(O)(=O)OCC3OC(CC3O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)C(COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3COP(O)(=O)OC3CC(OC3CO)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3ccc(N)nc3=O)n3cc(C)c(=O)[nH]c3=O)n3cnc4c3nc(N)[nH]c4=O)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)n3cnc4c(N)ncnc34)O2)c(=O)[nH]c1=O JLCPHMBAVCMARE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IVNALXNJOCZGMK-UHFFFAOYSA-M [4-[4-(dimethylamino)phenyl]iminocyclohexa-2,5-dien-1-ylidene]-dimethylazanium;chloride Chemical compound [Cl-].C1=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C1N=C1C=CC(=[N+](C)C)C=C1 IVNALXNJOCZGMK-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- XEIPQVVAVOUIOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Au]=S Chemical compound [Au]=S XEIPQVVAVOUIOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ROZSPJBPUVWBHW-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Ru]=O Chemical class [Ru]=O ROZSPJBPUVWBHW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- XLVKXZZJSTWDJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N [SiH4].[Si] Chemical group [SiH4].[Si] XLVKXZZJSTWDJY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CWRYPZZKDGJXCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N acenaphthalene Natural products C1=CC(CC2)=C3C2=CC=CC3=C1 CWRYPZZKDGJXCA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000010306 acid treatment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- DPKHZNPWBDQZCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N acridine orange free base Chemical compound C1=CC(N(C)C)=CC2=NC3=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C3C=C21 DPKHZNPWBDQZCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920006397 acrylic thermoplastic Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 125000002015 acyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000004279 alanine Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000001336 alkenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000005233 alkylalcohol group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000000029 amperostatic coulometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940025084 amphetamine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000019418 amylase Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000935 antidepressant agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940005513 antidepressants Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000004599 antimicrobial Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004019 antithrombin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003125 aqueous solvent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000004945 aromatic hydrocarbons Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052785 arsenic Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- RQNWIZPPADIBDY-UHFFFAOYSA-N arsenic atom Chemical compound [As] RQNWIZPPADIBDY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000732 arylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 235000003704 aspartic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000005311 autocorrelation function Methods 0.000 description 1
- 244000052616 bacterial pathogen Species 0.000 description 1
- 230000004888 barrier function Effects 0.000 description 1
- IWCQVOVBDXJJDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzene;chromium;cyclohexane Chemical compound [Cr].[CH-]1[CH-][CH-][CH-][CH-][CH-]1.C1=CC=CC=C1 IWCQVOVBDXJJDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DZBUGLKDJFMEHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzoquinolinylidene Natural products C1=CC=CC2=CC3=CC=CC=C3N=C21 DZBUGLKDJFMEHC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OQFSQFPPLPISGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N beta-carboxyaspartic acid Natural products OC(=O)C(N)C(C(O)=O)C(O)=O OQFSQFPPLPISGP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZDZHCHYQNPQSGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N binaphthyl group Chemical group C1(=CC=CC2=CC=CC=C12)C1=CC=CC2=CC=CC=C12 ZDZHCHYQNPQSGG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000013060 biological fluid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000001124 body fluid Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- GDTBXPJZTBHREO-UHFFFAOYSA-N bromine Substances BrBr GDTBXPJZTBHREO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052794 bromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229940124630 bronchodilator Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000000168 bronchodilator agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000008364 bulk solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- BBBFJLBPOGFECG-VJVYQDLKSA-N calcitonin Chemical compound N([C@H](C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(O)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1NC=NC=1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCCN)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC=1C=CC(O)=CC=1)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(=O)N[C@@H](CCCNC(N)=N)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)N1[C@@H](CCC1)C(N)=O)C(C)C)C(=O)[C@@H]1CSSC[C@H](N)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(N)=O)C(=O)N[C@@H](CC(C)C)C(=O)N[C@@H](CO)C(=O)N[C@@H]([C@@H](C)O)C(=O)N1 BBBFJLBPOGFECG-VJVYQDLKSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960004015 calcitonin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229930003827 cannabinoid Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 239000003557 cannabinoid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940065144 cannabinoids Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000003990 capacitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910002090 carbon oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001735 carboxylic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000000969 carrier Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000015556 catabolic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 210000003756 cervix mucus Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 230000003196 chaotropic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000003636 chemical group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000003638 chemical reducing agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960005091 chloramphenicol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- WIIZWVCIJKGZOK-RKDXNWHRSA-N chloramphenicol Chemical compound ClC(Cl)C(=O)N[C@H](CO)[C@H](O)C1=CC=C([N+]([O-])=O)C=C1 WIIZWVCIJKGZOK-RKDXNWHRSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052801 chlorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000000460 chlorine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000012000 cholesterol Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229940048961 cholinesterase Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000004587 chromatography analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000970 chrono-amperometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001567 chrono-coulometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960002376 chymotrypsin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 1
- ILZSSCVGGYJLOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N cobaltocene Chemical compound [Co+2].C=1C=C[CH-]C=1.C=1C=C[CH-]C=1 ILZSSCVGGYJLOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003920 cocaine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000009918 complex formation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003271 compound fluorescence assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012141 concentrate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000021615 conjugation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000356 contaminant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003869 coulometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003983 crown ethers Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000002484 cyclic voltammetry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001351 cycling effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 125000000753 cycloalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000007405 data analysis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006731 degradation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000010460 detection of virus Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001903 differential pulse voltammetry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000029087 digestion Effects 0.000 description 1
- LTMHDMANZUZIPE-PUGKRICDSA-N digoxin Chemical compound C1[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](C)O[C@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@@H](C)O[C@@H](O[C@@H]2[C@H](O[C@@H](O[C@@H]3C[C@@H]4[C@]([C@@H]5[C@H]([C@]6(CC[C@@H]([C@@]6(C)[C@H](O)C5)C=5COC(=O)C=5)O)CC4)(C)CC3)C[C@@H]2O)C)C[C@@H]1O LTMHDMANZUZIPE-PUGKRICDSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960005156 digoxin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- LTMHDMANZUZIPE-UHFFFAOYSA-N digoxine Natural products C1C(O)C(O)C(C)OC1OC1C(C)OC(OC2C(OC(OC3CC4C(C5C(C6(CCC(C6(C)C(O)C5)C=5COC(=O)C=5)O)CC4)(C)CC3)CC2O)C)CC1O LTMHDMANZUZIPE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000539 dimer Substances 0.000 description 1
- ZWWCURLKEXEFQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N dinitrogen pentaoxide Chemical class [O-][N+](=O)O[N+]([O-])=O ZWWCURLKEXEFQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NAGJZTKCGNOGPW-UHFFFAOYSA-K dioxido-sulfanylidene-sulfido-$l^{5}-phosphane Chemical compound [O-]P([O-])([S-])=S NAGJZTKCGNOGPW-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- QPJFIVIVOOQUKD-UHFFFAOYSA-N dipyrazino[2,3-f:2,3-h]quinoxaline Chemical group C1=CN=C2C3=NC=CN=C3C3=NC=CN=C3C2=N1 QPJFIVIVOOQUKD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940042399 direct acting antivirals protease inhibitors Drugs 0.000 description 1
- UVTNFZQICZKOEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N disopyramide Chemical compound C=1C=CC=NC=1C(C(N)=O)(CCN(C(C)C)C(C)C)C1=CC=CC=C1 UVTNFZQICZKOEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960001066 disopyramide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000005553 drilling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000975 dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920001746 electroactive polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000002848 electrochemical method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003934 electrogravimetry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001962 electrophoresis Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008030 elimination Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000003379 elimination reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000000688 enterotoxigenic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000007613 environmental effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002118 epoxides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000003700 epoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229960005309 estradiol Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229930182833 estradiol Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 150000002170 ethers Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- ZMMJGEGLRURXTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethidium bromide Chemical compound [Br-].C12=CC(N)=CC=C2C2=CC=C(N)C=C2[N+](CC)=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 ZMMJGEGLRURXTF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960005542 ethidium bromide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- HAPOVYFOVVWLRS-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethosuximide Chemical compound CCC1(C)CC(=O)NC1=O HAPOVYFOVVWLRS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960002767 ethosuximide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000001495 ethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- DEFVIWRASFVYLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethylene glycol bis(2-aminoethyl)tetraacetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CN(CC(O)=O)CCOCCOCCN(CC(O)=O)CC(O)=O DEFVIWRASFVYLL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000816 ethylene group Chemical group [H]C([H])([*:1])C([H])([H])[*:2] 0.000 description 1
- 238000011156 evaluation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001704 evaporation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008020 evaporation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000005281 excited state Effects 0.000 description 1
- 102000013165 exonuclease Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 229940012952 fibrinogen Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000012530 fluid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052731 fluorine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011737 fluorine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000011888 foil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000009472 formulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000002541 furyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 235000013922 glutamic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229910001922 gold oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910002804 graphite Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010439 graphite Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000003102 growth factor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000122 growth hormone Substances 0.000 description 1
- 208000019622 heart disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 208000006454 hepatitis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 231100000283 hepatitis Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 125000001072 heteroaryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 108010064060 high density lipoprotein receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 230000003054 hormonal effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960000890 hydrocortisone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000002431 hydrogen Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000004435 hydrogen atom Chemical group [H]* 0.000 description 1
- 125000002883 imidazolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000003018 immunoassay Methods 0.000 description 1
- 102000018358 immunoglobulin Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 229940072221 immunoglobulins Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000002847 impedance measurement Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001727 in vivo Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000001041 indolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000001939 inductive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 208000015181 infectious disease Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000002458 infectious effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011423 initialization method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960003786 inosine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000002917 insecticide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011810 insulating material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940125396 insulin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000003993 interaction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000002687 intercalation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 102000002467 interleukin receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010093036 interleukin receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000010681 interleukin-8 receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 108010038415 interleukin-8 receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229940047122 interleukins Drugs 0.000 description 1
- PNDPGZBMCMUPRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N iodine Chemical compound II PNDPGZBMCMUPRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N iridium atom Chemical compound [Ir] GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VFQXVTODMYMSMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N isonicotinamide Chemical compound NC(=O)C1=CC=NC=C1 VFQXVTODMYMSMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000005956 isoquinolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000002576 ketones Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000002372 labelling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000001499 laser induced fluorescence spectroscopy Methods 0.000 description 1
- NRYBAZVQPHGZNS-ZSOCWYAHSA-N leptin Chemical compound O=C([C@H](CO)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC=1C2=CC=CC=C2NC=1)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@@H](NC(=O)[C@H](CC(O)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@H](CC(C)C)NC(=O)[C@H](CO)NC(=O)CNC(=O)[C@H](CCC(N)=O)NC(=O)[C@@H](N)CC(C)C)CCSC)N1CCC[C@H]1C(=O)NCC(=O)N[C@@H](CS)C(O)=O NRYBAZVQPHGZNS-ZSOCWYAHSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940039781 leptin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 108010019813 leptin receptors Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000005861 leptin receptors Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 229960004194 lidocaine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000000670 limiting effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 235000019421 lipase Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000002632 lipids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001459 lithography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003908 liver function Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004020 luminiscence type Methods 0.000 description 1
- HWYHZTIRURJOHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N luminol Chemical compound O=C1NNC(=O)C2=C1C(N)=CC=C2 HWYHZTIRURJOHG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 210000002751 lymph Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000007403 mPCR Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052748 manganese Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000008018 melting Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002844 melting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012528 membrane Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000002503 metabolic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229960001252 methamphetamine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- MYWUZJCMWCOHBA-VIFPVBQESA-N methamphetamine Chemical compound CN[C@@H](C)CC1=CC=CC=C1 MYWUZJCMWCOHBA-VIFPVBQESA-N 0.000 description 1
- VNWKTOKETHGBQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N methane Chemical compound C VNWKTOKETHGBQD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000010445 mica Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052618 mica group Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000000813 microcontact printing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000000329 molecular dynamics simulation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011733 molybdenum Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000007837 multiplex assay Methods 0.000 description 1
- SHXOKQKTZJXHHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N n,n-diethyl-5-iminobenzo[a]phenoxazin-9-amine;hydrochloride Chemical compound [Cl-].C1=CC=C2C3=NC4=CC=C(N(CC)CC)C=C4OC3=CC(=[NH2+])C2=C1 SHXOKQKTZJXHHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001624 naphthyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000013642 negative control Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001537 neural effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- PGSADBUBUOPOJS-UHFFFAOYSA-N neutral red Chemical compound Cl.C1=C(C)C(N)=CC2=NC3=CC(N(C)C)=CC=C3N=C21 PGSADBUBUOPOJS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910017604 nitric acid Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000001807 normal pulse voltammetry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000001331 nose Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000007899 nucleic acid hybridization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 235000015097 nutrients Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229940127240 opiate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000005457 optimization Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000002894 organic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000011368 organic material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000003431 oxalo group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000007800 oxidant agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxo(oxoalumanyloxy)alumane Chemical compound O=[Al]O[Al]=O TWNQGVIAIRXVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PQQKPALAQIIWST-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxomolybdenum Chemical compound [Mo]=O PQQKPALAQIIWST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HBEQXAKJSGXAIQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxopalladium Chemical compound [Pd]=O HBEQXAKJSGXAIQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MUMZUERVLWJKNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxoplatinum Chemical compound [Pt]=O MUMZUERVLWJKNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004430 oxygen atom Chemical group O* 0.000 description 1
- 229910003445 palladium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FIKAKWIAUPDISJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L paraquat dichloride Chemical compound [Cl-].[Cl-].C1=C[N+](C)=CC=C1C1=CC=[N+](C)C=C1 FIKAKWIAUPDISJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 238000002161 passivation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000002097 pentamethylcyclopentadienyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000000137 peptide hydrolase inhibitor Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000816 peptidomimetic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002080 perylenyl group Chemical group C1(=CC=C2C=CC=C3C4=CC=CC5=CC=CC(C1=C23)=C45)* 0.000 description 1
- CSHWQDPOILHKBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N peryrene Natural products C1=CC(C2=CC=CC=3C2=C2C=CC=3)=C3C2=CC=CC3=C1 CSHWQDPOILHKBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000000575 pesticide Substances 0.000 description 1
- ASBFNPBREVZDOE-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenanthrene-9,10-diimine Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(=N)C(=N)C3=CC=CC=C3C2=C1 ASBFNPBREVZDOE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DDBREPKUVSBGFI-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenobarbital Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C1(CC)C(=O)NC(=O)NC1=O DDBREPKUVSBGFI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001997 phenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- COLNVLDHVKWLRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenylalanine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=CC=C1 COLNVLDHVKWLRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000004713 phosphodiesters Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- UEZVMMHDMIWARA-UHFFFAOYSA-M phosphonate Chemical compound [O-]P(=O)=O UEZVMMHDMIWARA-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 125000004437 phosphorous atom Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000002743 phosphorus functional group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000002186 photoactivation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000000206 photolithography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009832 plasma treatment Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013612 plasmid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003057 platinum Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229920003229 poly(methyl methacrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 108010064470 polyaspartate Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229920001748 polybutylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 125000003367 polycyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229920000573 polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002643 polyglutamic acid Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000656 polylysine Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001184 polypeptide Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001155 polypropylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001451 polypropylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002223 polystyrene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002635 polyurethane Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004814 polyurethane Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001205 potentiostatic coulometry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002265 prevention Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003141 primary amines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- DQMZLTXERSFNPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N primidone Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C1(CC)C(=O)NCNC1=O DQMZLTXERSFNPB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960002393 primidone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- REQCZEXYDRLIBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N procainamide Chemical compound CCN(CC)CCNC(=O)C1=CC=C(N)C=C1 REQCZEXYDRLIBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960000244 procainamide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940097325 prolactin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- QQONPFPTGQHPMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N propylene Natural products CC=C QQONPFPTGQHPMA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004805 propylene group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([*:1])C([H])([H])[*:2] 0.000 description 1
- 108010043671 prostatic acid phosphatase Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000000083 pulse voltammetry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000012521 purified sample Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003212 purines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000000561 purinyl group Chemical group N1=C(N=C2N=CNC2=C1)* 0.000 description 1
- CVSGFMWKZVZOJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyrazino[2,3-f]quinoxaline Chemical compound C1=CN=C2C3=NC=CN=C3C=CC2=N1 CVSGFMWKZVZOJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000003230 pyrimidines Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000000714 pyrimidinyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000000168 pyrrolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 238000011002 quantification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006862 quantum yield reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000005493 quinolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000004053 quinones Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000011084 recovery Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002468 redox effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007670 refining Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000241 respiratory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000005316 response function Methods 0.000 description 1
- MHOVAHRLVXNVSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodium atom Chemical compound [Rh] MHOVAHRLVXNVSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000019192 riboflavin Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000002151 riboflavin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229960002477 riboflavin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000002336 ribonucleotide Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000002652 ribonucleotide group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000003291 riboses Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- YYMBJDOZVAITBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N rubrene Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C(C1=C(C=2C=CC=CC=2)C2=CC=CC=C2C(C=2C=CC=CC=2)=C11)=C(C=CC=C2)C2=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 YYMBJDOZVAITBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001925 ruthenium oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OARRHUQTFTUEOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N safranin Chemical compound [Cl-].C=12C=C(N)C(C)=CC2=NC2=CC(C)=C(N)C=C2[N+]=1C1=CC=CC=C1 OARRHUQTFTUEOS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SOUHUMACVWVDME-UHFFFAOYSA-N safranin O Chemical compound [Cl-].C12=CC(N)=CC=C2N=C2C=CC(N)=CC2=[N+]1C1=CC=CC=C1 SOUHUMACVWVDME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 210000003296 saliva Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000005464 sample preparation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052706 scandium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- SIXSYDAISGFNSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N scandium atom Chemical compound [Sc] SIXSYDAISGFNSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052711 selenium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011669 selenium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 210000000582 semen Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000011896 sensitive detection Methods 0.000 description 1
- 210000002966 serum Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000004332 silver Substances 0.000 description 1
- HKZLPVFGJNLROG-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver monochloride Chemical compound [Cl-].[Ag+] HKZLPVFGJNLROG-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000002689 soil Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910000679 solder Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000006850 spacer group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000009870 specific binding Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001228 spectrum Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009718 spray deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004544 sputter deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004365 square wave voltammetry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011550 stock solution Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000003950 stripping voltammetry Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003440 styrenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000003107 substituted aryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 235000000346 sugar Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000004763 sulfides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000001174 sulfone group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000000472 sulfonyl group Chemical group *S(*)(=O)=O 0.000 description 1
- 150000003463 sulfur Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000004354 sulfur functional group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000001629 suppression Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052715 tantalum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N tantalum atom Chemical compound [Ta] GUVRBAGPIYLISA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GKLVYJBZJHMRIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N technetium atom Chemical compound [Tc] GKLVYJBZJHMRIY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JBQYATWDVHIOAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N tellanylidenegermanium Chemical compound [Te]=[Ge] JBQYATWDVHIOAR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ISXSCDLOGDJUNJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N tert-butyl prop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(C)(C)OC(=O)C=C ISXSCDLOGDJUNJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003604 testosterone Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 125000000383 tetramethylene group Chemical group [H]C([H])([*:1])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])C([H])([H])[*:2] 0.000 description 1
- 229960000278 theophylline Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000005382 thermal cycling Methods 0.000 description 1
- 125000000335 thiazolyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000001544 thienyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229930192474 thiophene Natural products 0.000 description 1
- RYYWUUFWQRZTIU-UHFFFAOYSA-K thiophosphate Chemical compound [O-]P([O-])([O-])=S RYYWUUFWQRZTIU-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 229960004072 thrombin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000036962 time dependent Effects 0.000 description 1
- XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N tin dioxide Chemical compound O=[Sn]=O XOLBLPGZBRYERU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910001887 tin oxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OGIDPMRJRNCKJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N titanium oxide Inorganic materials [Ti]=O OGIDPMRJRNCKJF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 231100000331 toxic Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 230000002588 toxic effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003053 toxin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 231100000765 toxin Toxicity 0.000 description 1
- 108700012359 toxins Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 239000012581 transferrin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000009466 transformation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002054 transplantation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003626 triacylglycerols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- UNXRWKVEANCORM-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphosphoric acid Chemical class OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(=O)OP(O)(O)=O UNXRWKVEANCORM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000012588 trypsin Substances 0.000 description 1
- 201000008827 tuberculosis Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 210000004881 tumor cell Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- ZNOKGRXACCSDPY-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten trioxide Chemical compound O=[W](=O)=O ZNOKGRXACCSDPY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- OUYCCCASQSFEME-UHFFFAOYSA-N tyrosine Natural products OC(=O)C(N)CC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 OUYCCCASQSFEME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000712461 unidentified influenza virus Species 0.000 description 1
- 229940035893 uracil Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 210000002700 urine Anatomy 0.000 description 1
- 238000001771 vacuum deposition Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229960000604 valproic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- LEONUFNNVUYDNQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N vanadium atom Chemical compound [V] LEONUFNNVUYDNQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 108700026220 vif Genes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 238000005406 washing Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003631 wet chemical etching Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000001018 xanthene dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940075420 xanthine Drugs 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
- G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
- G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
- G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
- G01N33/543—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor with an insoluble carrier for immobilising immunochemicals
- G01N33/54366—Apparatus specially adapted for solid-phase testing
- G01N33/54373—Apparatus specially adapted for solid-phase testing involving physiochemical end-point determination, e.g. wave-guides, FETS, gratings
- G01N33/5438—Electrodes
Definitions
- Gene probe assays currently play roles in identifying infectious organisms such as bacteria and viruses, in probing the expression of normal genes and identifying mutant genes such as oncogenes, in typing tissue for compatibility preceding tissue transplantation, in matching tissue or blood samples for forensic medicine, and for exploring homology among genes from different species.
- a gene probe assay should be sensitive, specific and easily automatable (for a review, see Nickerson, Current Opinion in Biotechnology 4:48-51 (1993)).
- the requirement for sensitivity e.g. low detection limits
- PCR polymerase chain reaction
- other amplification technologies which allow researchers to amplify exponentially a specific nucleic acid sequence before analysis as outlined below (for a review, see Abramson et al., Current Opinion in Biotechnology, 4:41-47 (1993)).
- Target amplification involves the amplification (e.g. replication) of the target sequence to be detected, resulting in a significant increase in the number of target molecules.
- Target amplification strategies include the polymerase chain reaction (PCR), strand displacement amplification (SDA), and nucleic acid sequence based amplification (NASBA).
- amplification strategies include the ligase chain reaction (LCR), cycling probe technology (CPT), and the use of “amplification probes” such as “branched DNA” that result in multiple label probes binding to a single target sequence.
- PCR polymerase chain reaction
- SDA Strand displacement amplification
- Nucleic acid sequence based amplification is generally described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,409,818 and “Profiting from Gene-based Diagnostics,” CTB International Publishing Inc., N.J., 1996, both of which are incorporated by reference.
- LCR ligation chain reaction
- Branched DNA signal amplification relies on the synthesis of branched nucleic acids, containing a multiplicity of nucleic acid “arms” that function to increase the amount of label that can be put onto one probe.
- This technology is generally described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,681,702, 5,597,909, 5,545,730, 5,594,117, 5,591,584, 5,571,670, 5,580,731, 5,571,670, 5,591,584, 5,624,802, 5,635,352, 5,594,118, 5,359,100, 5,124,246 and 5,681,697, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
- dendrimers of nucleic acids serve to vastly increase the amount of label that can be added to a single molecule, using a similar idea but different compositions. This technology is as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,175,270 and Nilsen et al., J. Theor. Biol. 187:273 (1997), both of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- biosensors rely on electronic signals for detection.
- biosensors At least two types of biosensors are known; enzyme-based or metabolic biosensors and binding or bioaffinity sensors. See for example U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,713,347; 5,192,507; 4,920,047; 3,873,267; and references disclosed therein, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference. While some of these known sensors use alternating current (AC) techniques, these techniques are generally limited to the detection of differences in bulk (or dielectric) impedance.
- AC alternating current
- nucleic acid biosensors There are a variety of nucleic acid biosensors currently known. These include nucleic acid biochips based on fluorescent detection; see for example materials developed by Affymetrix (including, but not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,800,992, 5,445,934, 5,744,305, and related patents and materials), Nanogen (including, but not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,532,129, 5,605,662, 5,565,322 and 5,632,957 and related patents and materials), Southern (EP 0 373 023 B1) and Synteni/Incyte (WO 95/35505 and related patents and materials). Similarly, electronic detection of nucleic acids using electrodes is also known; see for example U.S. Pat. Nos.
- the invention provides a method for detecting the presence of a target analyte in a sample.
- the method comprises a) providing an electrode comprising a monolayer and a capture binding ligand; b) initializing the electrode; c) hybridizing a probe to said target analyte to form an assay complex; and d) detecting the presence or absence of said target analyte.
- the detecting provides a better signal to noise ratio than a method wherein no initializing step b) is performed.
- said target analyte is selected from the group consisting of a nucleic acid, a protein, and a combination thereof.
- the monolayer is a self-assembled monolayer (SAM).
- the SAM comprises insulators.
- the SAM comprises conductive oligomers.
- the capture binding ligand further comprises an attachment linker.
- the initialization step comprises applying an electronic signal to said electrode.
- said probe is attached to an electron transfer moiety (ETM).
- ETM electron transfer moiety
- the ETM is responsive to an input waveform.
- the ETM is a metallocene.
- the metallocene is a ferrocene.
- the ferrocene is a ferrocene derivative.
- the probe is covalently attached to the ETM.
- the detecting comprises applying an input signal to said electrode.
- the input signal generates an output waveform based substantially on electron transfer between said ETM and said electrode.
- the electrode is gold.
- the input signal is AC/DC offset.
- the AC frequency ranges from 90-1000 Hz.
- the AC voltage ranges from ⁇ 150 to 880 mV rms.
- electrode initialization is performed for 0.5 seconds. In an embodiment, electrode initialization is performed for 1 second. In an embodiment, electrode initialization is performed for 2 seconds. In an embodiment, electrode initialization is performed for 5 seconds. In an embodiment, electrode initialization is performed for 10 seconds. In an embodiment, electrode initialization is performed for longer than 10 seconds.
- FIGS. 1A-1R illustrate a number of different compositions of the invention; the results are shown in Example 1 and 2 of PCT US99/01703, hereby expressly incorporated by reference.
- FIG. 1A depicts I, also referred to as P290.
- FIG. 1B depicts II, also referred to as P291.
- FIG. 1C depicts III, also referred to as W31.
- FIG. 1D depicts IV, also referred to as N6.
- FIG. 1E depicts V, also referred to as P292.
- FIG. 1F depicts II, also referred to as C23.
- FIG. 1G depicts VII, also referred to as C15.
- FIG. 1H depicts VIII, also referred to as C95.
- FIG. 1I depicts Y63.
- FIG. 1J depicts another compound of the invention.
- FIG. 1K depicts N11.
- FIG. 1L depicts C131, with a phosphoramidite group and a DMT protecting group.
- FIG. 1M depicts W38, also with a phosphoramidite group and a DMT protecting group.
- FIG. 1N depicts the commercially available moiety that enables “branching” to occur, as its incorporation into a growing oligonucleotide chain results in addition at both the DMT protected oxygens.
- FIG. 1O depicts glen, also with a phosphoramidite group and a DMT protecting group, that serves as a non-nucleic acid linker.
- FIGS. 1A to 1G and 1J are shown without the phosphoramidite and protecting groups (e.g. DMT) that are readily added.
- FIGS. 1P-1R show PS32, N6 and W97.
- FIGS. 2A-2C illustrate several embodiments for mismatch detection.
- FIG. 2 depicts the use of an electrode 105 with a self-assembled monolayer 15 comprising passivation agents and a capture probe 20 attached via an attachment linker 10 .
- the capture probe 20 has an interrogation position 25 that may comprise a mismatch with the detection position on the target sequence 120 .
- FIG. 2A depicts the target sequence 120 comprising the ETMs 135 ;
- FIG. 2B depicts the use of a label probe 40 with the ETMs 135 .
- amplification probes, label extender probes, etc. can also be used.
- FIG. 2C utilizes a label probe 40 with the detection position 25 . Again, amplification probes, label extender probes, etc. can also be used.
- FIGS. 3A-3B illustrate different compositions of the invention.
- FIG. 3A depicts QW56 and
- FIG. 3B depicts QW80.
- FIG. 4 illustrates an overview of the electrode initialization protocol described by the present invention.
- FIGS. 5A-5B illustrate that electrode initialization improves CF results relating to Eo shifting.
- FIG. 6 illustrates that electrode initialization statistically improves CF results relating to score shifting.
- FIGS. 7A-7B illustrate that electrode initialization reduces low signal traces.
- FIGS. 8A-8F illustrates false heterozygotes observed without electrode initialization.
- FIGS. 9A-9D illustrates that electrode initialization eliminates false heterozygotes.
- FIG. 10 illustrates signal improvement at different electrode initialization time periods.
- FIG. 11 illustrates noise reduction at different electrode initialization time periods.
- FIGS. 12A-12B illustrate signal improvement at different electrode initialization time periods.
- FIGS. 13A-13B illustrate noise reduction at different electrode initialization time periods.
- FIG. 14 illustrates reduced background signals at different electrode initialization time periods.
- FIG. 15 illustrates reduced MS2 signals at different electrode initialization time periods.
- FIG. 16 illustrates increased signal-noise ratios at 2 and 5 second electrode initialization periods.
- FIG. 17 depicts a cystic fibrosis chip analysis showing that the electrode initialization reduces E0 variability and localizes it to the expected E0 of the ferrocene label.
- the control e.g. no initialization, are the three left hand data samples.
- the EI(1) protocol is a sweep of 150 to +750 mV for 5 seconds
- the EI(2) protocol is a sweep of 150 to +750 mV for 2 seconds. In this case, the 5 second sweep localizes the E0 better than either no EI or a 2 second EI.
- FIG. 18 shows the score shifting that happens on a cystic fibrosis chip, as the EI reduces non-specific binding ( FIG. 18 ) and improves scores for the affected analytes (see FIG. 19 ).
- the EI protocols are as described in FIG. 17 .
- FIGS. 19A and 19B show the improved scores for particular analytes.
- FIGS. 20A and 20B depicts the reduction of low signal miscalls, as EI improves the scores, as signals just above threshold show improved scores.
- FIGS. 21A and 21B show the elimination of the tailing effect in signal trace that can cause poor curve fit.
- FIGS. 22A-22D from a respiratory viral panel chip, shows the effectiveness of the EI protocols (in this case using 0.5, 2, 5 and 10 second sweep) in reducing the variability of the signals.
- FIG. 22 shows that some targets are more affected than others and that different EI times can be used for different electrodes.
- FIG. 23 also from a RVP chip, shows that the EI protocols background signal improves signals across different chips and samples. The background is observed with non-amplified PCR buffers or Qiagen buffer.
- the present invention is directed to the use of signal processing methods for use in the electrochemical detection of target analytes on the surface of a monolayer.
- the observed signal is a combination of signal from the target analyte (sample signal) and signal from the background, or noise.
- the present invention is directed to techniques that provide variations in initiation signals (e.g. varying the “input”) that can be used to increase the signal, decrease the noise, or make the signal more obvious or detectable in a background of noise.
- the present invention provides compositions and methods directed to an electrode initialization step for the electrochemical treatment of monolayers used in electron transfer detection methods. Electrode initialization creates a more stable monolayer, and resolves variability within the electrochemical signal detected on the monolayer.
- the electrode initialization methods outlined herein provide surprising benefits in three separate ways.
- the potential at which the electrochemical label oxidizes is shifted as a result of the these variations in the reference electrode. This can result in a poor fit of the signal trace by the assay software, and can lead in some cases to miscalls of sequence.
- the score is shifted closer to an indeterminate boundary of the assay's calling parameters. The score in this case (seen in the figures) is the ratio of the wild-type signal to the mismatch signal (WT:MT).
- each “pad” or electrode can be initialized separately, depending on the capture ligands, probes, etc. That is, the affinity of different label probes within a multiplex assay to different electrodes with different capture probes may be different, as shown in the Figures. Thus, the ability to initialize different electrodes with different capture probes leads to increased signal to noise ratios.
- any assay that relies on electrochemical detection will benefit from the present invention.
- the present invention finds particular use in systems generally described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,591,578, 5,824,473, 5,770,369, 5,705,348 5,780,234, 6,686,150 and 7,090,804, 7,935,481, and PCT application WO98/20162, all of which are expressly incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
- capture probes when the target analyte is a nucleic acid
- the assay complex further comprises an electron transfer moiety (ETM) that is directly or indirectly attached to the target analyte.
- ETM electron transfer moiety
- the presence of the ETM near the electrode surface is dependent on the presence of the target analyte. Electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode is initiated using a variety of techniques as outlined below, and the output signals received and optionally processed as further outlined below. Thus, by detecting electron transfer, the presence or absence of the target analyte is determined.
- the compositions and methods provided herein are related to the detection of the presence of a target analyte in a sample.
- the sample solution may comprise any number of things, including, but not limited to, bodily fluids (including, but not limited to, blood, urine, serum, lymph, saliva, anal and vaginal secretions, perspiration and semen, of virtually any organism, with mammalian samples being preferred and human samples being particularly preferred); environmental samples (including, but not limited to, air, agricultural, water and soil samples); biological warfare agent samples; research samples (e.g.
- the sample may be the products of an amplification reaction, including both target and signal amplification as is generally described in PCT/US99/01705, such as PCR amplification reaction); purified samples, such as purified genomic DNA, RNA, proteins, etc.; raw samples (bacteria, virus, genomic DNA, etc.; As will be appreciated by those in the art, virtually any experimental manipulation may have been done on the sample.
- an amplification reaction including both target and signal amplification as is generally described in PCT/US99/01705, such as PCR amplification reaction
- purified samples such as purified genomic DNA, RNA, proteins, etc.
- raw samples bacteria, virus, genomic DNA, etc.
- target analytes or grammatical equivalents herein is meant any molecule or compound to be detected.
- target analytes preferably bind to binding ligands, as is more fully described below.
- a large number of analytes may be detected using the present methods; basically, any target analyte for which a binding ligand, described below, may be made may be detected using the methods of the invention.
- Suitable analytes include organic and inorganic molecules, including biomolecules.
- the analyte may be an environmental pollutant (including pesticides, insecticides, toxins, etc.); a chemical (including solvents, organic materials, etc.); therapeutic molecules (including therapeutic and abused drugs, antibiotics, etc.); biomolecules (including hormones, cytokines, proteins, lipids, carbohydrates, cellular membrane antigens and receptors (neural, hormonal, nutrient, and cell surface receptors) or their ligands, etc); whole cells (including procaryotic (such as pathogenic bacteria) and eucaryotic cells, including mammalian tumor cells); viruses (including retroviruses, herpesviruses, adenoviruses, lentiviruses, etc.); and spores; etc.
- Analytes can be environmental pollutants; nucleic acids; proteins (including enzymes, antibodies, antigens, growth factors, cytokines, etc); therapeutic and abused drugs; cells; and
- Protein as used herein includes proteins, polypeptides, and peptides.
- the protein may be made up of naturally occurring amino acids and peptide bonds, or synthetic peptidomimetic structures.
- the side chains may be in either the (R) or the (S) configuration.
- the amino acids are in the (S) or L-configuration. If non-naturally occurring side chains are used, non-amino acid substituents may be used, for example to prevent or retard in vivo degradations.
- Suitable protein target analytes include, but are not limited to, (1) immunoglobulins, particularly IgEs, IgGs and IgMs, and particularly therapeutically or diagnostically relevant antibodies, including but not limited to, for example, antibodies to human albumin, apolipoproteins (including apolipoprotein E), human chorionic gonadotropin, cortisol, ⁇ -fetoprotein, thyroxin, thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), antithrombin, antibodies to pharmaceuticals (including antieptileptic drugs (phenyloin, primidone, carbariezepin, ethosuximide, valproic acid, and phenobarbitol), cardioactive drugs (digoxin, lidocaine, procainamide, and disopyramide), bronchodilators (theophylline), antibiotics (chloramphenicol, sulfonamides), antidepressants, immunosuppresants, abused drugs (amphetamine, methamphetamine, cann
- influenza virus influenza virus
- paramyxoviruses e.g respiratory syncytial virus, mumps virus, measles virus
- adenoviruses e.g. respiratory syncytial virus
- rhinoviruses e.g. coronaviruses
- reoviruses e.g. togaviruses (e.g. rubella virus)
- parvoviruses poxviruses (e.g. variola virus, vaccinia virus)
- enteroviruses e.g. poliovirus, coxsackievirus
- hepatitis viruses including A, B and C
- herpesviruses e.g.
- Vibrio e.g. V. cholerae
- Escherichia e.g. Enterotoxigenic E.
- coli Shigella , e.g. S. dysenteriae; Salmonella , e.g. S. typhi; Mycobacterium e.g. M. tuberculosis , M. Ieprae; Clostridium , e.g. C. botulinum, C. tetani, C. difficile, C. perfringens ; Cornyebacterium, e.g. C. diphtheriae; Streptococcus, S. pyogenes, S. pneumoniae; Staphylococcus , e.g. S. aureus; Haemophilus , e.g. H. influenzae; Neisseria , e.g. N.
- meningitidis N. gonorrhoeae
- Yersinia e.g. G. lamblia Y. pestis
- Pseudomonas e.g. P. aeruginosa
- P. putida e.g.
- Chlamydia e.g. C. trachomatis
- Bordetella e.g. B. pertussis
- Treponema e.g. T.
- enzymes including but not limited to, enzymes used as indicators of or treatment for heart disease, including creatine kinase, lactate dehydrogenase, aspartate amino transferase, troponin T, myoglobin, fibrinogen, cholesterol, triglycerides, thrombin, tissue plasminogen activator (tPA); pancreatic disease indicators including amylase, lipase, chymotrypsin and trypsin; liver function enzymes and proteins including cholinesterase, bilirubin, and alkaline phosphotase; aldolase, prostatic acid phosphatase, terminal deoxynucleotidyl transferase, and bacterial and viral enzymes such as HIV protease; (3) hormones and cytokines (many of which serve as ligands for cellular receptors) such as erythropoietin (EPO), thrombopoietin (T)
- TGF- ⁇ human growth hormone transferrin, epidermal growth factor (EGF), low density lipoprotein, high density lipoprotein, leptin, VEGF, PDGF, ciliary neurotrophic factor, prolactin, adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH), calcitonin, human chorionic gonadotropin, cotrisol, estradiol, follicle stimulating hormone (FSH), thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH), leutinzing hormone (LH), progeterone and testosterone; and (4) other proteins (including ⁇ -fetoprotein, carcinoembryonic antigen CEA, cancer markers, etc.).
- EGF epidermal growth factor
- FSH follicle stimulating hormone
- TSH thyroid-stimulating hormone
- LH leutinzing hormone
- progeterone progeterone and testosterone
- other proteins including ⁇ -fetoprotein, carcinoembryonic antigen CEA, cancer markers, etc.
- any of the biomolecules for which antibodies may be detected may be detected directly as well; that is, detection of virus or bacterial cells, therapeutic and abused drugs, etc., may be done directly.
- Suitable target analytes include carbohydrates, including but not limited to, markers for breast cancer (CA15-3, CA 549, CA 27.29), mucin-like carcinoma associated antigen (MCA), ovarian cancer (CA125), pancreatic cancer (DE-PAN-2), prostate cancer (PSA), CEA, and colorectal and pancreatic cancer (CA 19, CA 50, CA242).
- Suitable target analytes include metal ions, particularly heavy and/or toxic metals, including but not limited to, aluminum, arsenic, cadmium, selenium, cobalt, copper, chromium, lead, silver and nickel.
- Target analytes can be nucleic acids.
- the target analyte is a nucleic acid, and target sequences are detected.
- target sequence or “target nucleic acid” or grammatical equivalents herein means a nucleic acid sequence on a single strand of nucleic acid.
- the target sequence may be a portion of a gene, a regulatory sequence, genomic DNA, cDNA, RNA including mRNA and rRNA, or others. It may be any length, with the understanding that longer sequences are more specific.
- the complementary target sequence may take many forms. For example, it may be contained within a larger nucleic acid sequence, e.g.
- probes are made to hybridize to target sequences to determine the presence or absence of the target sequence in a sample.
- the target sequence may also be comprised of different target domains; for example, a first target domain of the sample target sequence may hybridize to a capture probe or a portion of capture extender probe, a second target domain may hybridize to a portion of an amplifier probe, a label probe, or a different capture or capture extender probe, etc.
- the target domains may be adjacent or separated.
- first and second are not meant to confer an orientation of the sequences with respect to the 5′-3′ orientation of the target sequence.
- the first target domain may be located either 5′ to the second domain, or 3′ to the second domain.
- nucleic acid or “oligonucleotide” or grammatical equivalents herein means at least two nucleotides covalently linked together.
- a nucleic acid of the present invention will generally contain phosphodiester bonds, although in some cases, as outlined below, nucleic acid analogs are included that may have alternate backbones, comprising, for example, phosphoramide (Beaucage et al., Tetrahedron 49(10):1925 (1993) and references therein; Letsinger, J. Org. Chem. 35:3800 (1970); Sblul et al., Eur. J. Biochem. 81:579 (1977); Letsinger et al., Nucl. Acids Res.
- nucleic acid analogs may find use in the present invention.
- mixtures of naturally occurring nucleic acids and analogs can be made; for example, at the site of an ETM attachment, or an analog structure may be used.
- mixtures of different nucleic acid analogs, and mixtures of naturally occurring nucleic acids and analogs may be made.
- An embodiment includes peptide nucleic acids (PNA) which includes peptide nucleic acid analogs.
- PNA peptide nucleic acids
- These backbones are substantially non-ionic under neutral conditions, in contrast to the highly charged phosphodiester backbone of naturally occurring nucleic acids. This results in two advantages.
- the PNA backbone exhibits improved hybridization kinetics. PNAs have larger changes in the melting temperature (Tm) for mismatched versus perfectly matched basepairs. DNA and RNA typically exhibit a 2-4° C. drop in Tm for an internal mismatch. With the non-ionic PNA backbone, the drop is closer to 7-9° C. This allows for better detection of mismatches.
- Tm melting temperature
- RNA typically exhibit a 2-4° C. drop in Tm for an internal mismatch.
- the non-ionic PNA backbone the drop is closer to 7-9° C. This allows for better detection of mismatches.
- hybridization of the bases attached to these backbones is relatively in
- the nucleic acids may be single stranded or double stranded, as specified, or contain portions of both double stranded or single stranded sequence.
- the nucleic acid may be DNA, both genomic and cDNA, RNA or a hybrid, where the nucleic acid contains any combination of deoxyribo- and ribo-nucleotides, and any combination of bases, including uracil, adenine, thymine, cytosine, guanine, inosine, xanthine hypoxanthine, isocytosine, isoguanine, etc.
- nucleoside includes nucleotides as well as nucleoside and nucleotide analogs, and modified nucleosides such as amino modified nucleosides.
- nucleoside includes non-naturally occurring analog structures. Thus for example the individual units of a peptide nucleic acid, each containing a base, are referred to herein as a nucleoside.
- the target analyte can be amplified when the target is a nucleic acid.
- Target amplification involves the amplification (replication) of the target sequence to be detected, such that the number of copies of the target sequence is increased.
- Suitable target amplification techniques include, but are not limited to, the polymerase chain reaction (PCR), strand displacement amplification (SDA), and nucleic acid sequence based amplification (NASBA).
- compositions and methods of the present invention comprise electrodes.
- electrode herein is meant a composition, which, when connected to an electronic device, is able to sense a current or charge and convert it to a signal.
- an electrode can be defined as a composition which can apply a potential to and/or pass electrons to or from species in the solution.
- an electrode can be an ETM as described herein.
- Electrodes include, but are not limited to, certain metals and their oxides, including gold; platinum; palladium; silicon; aluminum; metal oxide electrodes including platinum oxide, titanium oxide, tin oxide, indium tin oxide, palladium oxide, silicon oxide, aluminum oxide, molybdenum oxide (MO 2 O 6 ), tungsten oxide (WO 3 ) and ruthenium oxides; and carbon (including glassy carbon electrodes, graphite and carbon paste). Electrodes include gold, silicon, platinum, carbon and metal oxide electrodes.
- the conformation of the electrode will vary with the detection method used.
- flat planar electrodes can be used for optical detection methods, or when arrays of nucleic acids are made, thus requiring addressable locations for both synthesis and detection.
- the electrode may be in the form of a tube, with SAMs comprising capture binding ligands to the inner surface. Electrode coils can be used in some embodiments as well. This allows a maximum of surface area containing the target analytes to be exposed to a small volume of sample.
- the detection electrodes are formed on a substrate.
- the discussion herein is generally directed to the formation of gold electrodes, but as will be appreciated by those in the art, other electrodes can be used as well.
- the substrate can comprise a wide variety of materials, as will be appreciated by those in the art, such as printed circuit board (PCB) materials.
- the suitable substrates include, but are not limited to, fiberglass, teflon, ceramics, glass, silicon, mica, plastic (including acrylics, polystyrene and copolymers of styrene and other materials, polypropylene, polyethylene, polybutylene, polycarbonate, polyurethanes, TeflonTM, and derivatives thereof, etc.), GETEK (a blend of polypropylene oxide and fiberglass), etc.
- glass may not be preferred as a substrate.
- materials can include printed circuit board materials.
- Circuit board materials are those that comprise an insulating substrate that is coated with a conducting layer and processed using lithography techniques, particularly photolithography techniques, to form the patterns of electrodes and interconnects (sometimes referred to in the art as interconnections or leads).
- the insulating substrate is generally, but not always, a polymer.
- one or a plurality of layers may be used, to make either “two dimensional” (e.g. all electrodes and interconnections in a plane) or “three dimensional” (wherein the electrodes are on one surface and the interconnects may go through the board to the other side) boards.
- Circuit board materials are often provided with a foil already attached to the substrate, such as a copper foil, with additional copper added as needed (for example for interconnections), for example by electroplating.
- the copper surface may then need to be roughened, for example through etching, to allow attachment of the adhesion layer.
- array herein is meant a plurality of capture ligands in an array format; the size of the array will depend on the composition and end use of the array. Arrays containing from about 2 different capture ligands to many thousands can be made. Generally, the array will comprise from two to as many as 100,000 or more, depending on the size of the electrodes, as well as the end use of the array. Ranges can be from about 2 to about 10,000, from about 5 to about 1000, and from about 10 to about 100.
- compositions of the invention may not be in array format; that is, for some embodiments, compositions comprising a single capture ligand may be made as well.
- multiple substrates may be used, either of different or identical compositions.
- large arrays may comprise a plurality of smaller substrates.
- the present invention provides biochips (sometimes referred to herein “chips”) that comprise substrates comprising a plurality of electrodes, preferably gold electrodes.
- the number of electrodes is as outlined for arrays.
- Each electrode preferably comprises a self-assembled monolayer as outlined herein.
- one of the monolayer-forming species comprises a capture ligand as outlined herein.
- each electrode has an interconnection that is attached to the electrode at one end and is ultimately attached to a device that can control the electrode sometimes through multiplexed devices, (e.g. MUX). That is, each electrode is independently addressable.
- MUX multiplexed devices
- the substrates can be part of a larger device comprising a detection chamber that exposes a given volume of sample to the detection electrode.
- the detection chamber ranges from about 1 nL to 1 ml, with about 10 ⁇ L to 500 ⁇ L being preferred. As will be appreciated by those in the art, depending on the experimental conditions and assay, smaller or larger volumes may be used.
- the detection chamber and electrode are part of a cartridge that can be placed into a device comprising electronic components (an AC/DC voltage source, an ammeter, a processor, a read-out display, temperature controller, light source, etc.).
- electronic components an AC/DC voltage source, an ammeter, a processor, a read-out display, temperature controller, light source, etc.
- the interconnections from each electrode are positioned such that upon insertion of the cartridge into the device, connections between the electrodes and the electronic components are established.
- the connections from the electrodes are made by passing through the substrate to produce a so called land grid array that can interface to a pogo pin or like connector to make connections from the chip to the instrument.
- pogo pin connectors are used in place of edge card connectors.
- the electrode array is one surface of the substrate, such as a PCR board or ceramic substrate, and there are “through board” or “through substrate” interconnects ending in pads.
- the substrate such as a PCR board or ceramic substrate
- through board or “through substrate” interconnects ending in pads.
- switching circuitry multiplexers
- these embodiments are described in US publication 2011/0180425, herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- Detection electrodes on circuit board material are generally prepared in a wide variety of ways.
- high purity gold is used, and it may be deposited on a surface via vacuum deposition processes (sputtering and evaporation) or solution deposition (electroplating or electroless processes).
- the substrate When electroplating is done, the substrate must initially comprise a conductive material; fiberglass circuit boards are frequently provided with copper foil.
- an adhesion layer between the substrate and the gold in order to insure good mechanical stability is used.
- embodiments utilize a deposition layer of an adhesion metal such as chromium, titanium, titanium/tungsten, tantalum, nickel or palladium, which can be deposited as above for the gold.
- grain refining additives When electroplated metal (either the adhesion metal or the electrode metal) is used, grain refining additives, frequently referred to in the trade as brighteners, can optionally be added to alter surface deposition properties. Brighteners are mixtures of organic and inorganic species, with cobalt and nickel being preferred.
- the adhesion layer is from about 100 ⁇ thick to about 25 microns (1000 microinches). If the adhesion metal is electrochemically active, the electrode metal must be coated at a thickness that prevents “bleed-through”; if the adhesion metal is not electrochemically active, the electrode metal may be thinner.
- the electrode metal preferably gold
- the electrode metal is deposited at thicknesses ranging from about 500 ⁇ to about 5 microns (200 microinches), with from about 30 microinches to about 50 microinches being preferred.
- the gold is deposited to make electrodes ranging in size from about 5 microns to about 5 mm in diameter, with about 100 to 250 microns being preferred.
- the detection electrodes thus formed are then preferably cleaned and SAMs added, as is discussed below.
- the present invention provides methods of making a substrate comprising a plurality of gold electrodes.
- the methods first comprise coating an adhesion metal, such as nickel or palladium (optionally with brightener), onto the substrate. Electroplating is preferred.
- the electrode metal preferably gold, is then coated (again, with electroplating preferred) onto the adhesion metal.
- the patterns of the device, comprising the electrodes and their associated interconnections are made using lithographic techniques, particularly photolithographic techniques as are known in the art, and wet chemical etching.
- a non-conductive chemically resistive insulating material such as solder mask or plastic is laid down using these photolithographic techniques, leaving only the electrodes and a connection point to the leads exposed; the leads themselves are generally coated.
- the electrodes of the invention comprise monolayers, which can include self-assembled monolayers (SAMs).
- SAMs self-assembled monolayers
- ETMs either covalently to one of the strands or non-covalently to the hybridization complex through the use of hybridization indicators, described below
- ETMs either covalently to one of the strands or non-covalently to the hybridization complex through the use of hybridization indicators, described below
- the ETM can be detected, not necessarily via electron transfer through nucleic acid, but rather can be directly detected on an electrode comprising a SAM; that is, the electrons from the ETMs need not travel through the stacked ⁇ orbitals in order to generate a signal.
- the detection electrode preferably comprises a self-assembled monolayer (SAM) that serves to shield the electrode from redox-active species in the sample.
- SAM self-assembled monolayer
- an assay complex is formed that contains an ETM, which is then detected using the detection electrode.
- the electrode comprises a monolayer.
- target analyte binding for example, oligonucleotide hybridization
- non-specific binding of biomolecules, including the target analytes, to an electrode is generally reduced when a monolayer is present.
- a monolayer facilitates the maintenance of the analyte away from the electrode surface.
- a monolayer serves to keep charged species away from the surface of the electrode. Thus, this layer helps to prevent electrical contact between the electrodes and the ETMs, or between the electrode and charged species within the solvent.
- the monolayer is preferably tightly packed in a uniform layer on the electrode surface, such that a minimum of “holes” exist.
- the monolayer thus serves as a physical barrier to block solvent accessibility to the electrode.
- monolayer or “self-assembled monolayer” or “SAM” herein is meant a relatively ordered assembly of molecules spontaneously chemisorbed on a surface, in which the molecules are oriented approximately parallel to each other and roughly perpendicular to the surface. A majority of the molecules include a functional group that adheres to the surface, and a portion that interacts with neighboring molecules in the monolayer to form the relatively ordered array.
- a “mixed” monolayer comprises a heterogeneous monolayer, that is, where at least two different molecules make up the monolayer.
- the monolayer comprises conductive oligomers.
- conductive oligomer herein is meant a substantially conducting oligomer, preferably linear, some embodiments of which are referred to in the literature as “molecular wires.”
- substantially conducting herein is meant that the oligomer is capable of transferring electrons at 100 Hz.
- the conductive oligomer has substantially overlapping ⁇ -orbitals, e.g. conjugated ⁇ -orbitals, as between the monomeric units of the conductive oligomer, although the conductive oligomer may also contain one or more sigma ( ⁇ ) bonds.
- a conductive oligomer may be defined functionally by its ability to inject or receive electrons into or from an associated ETM. Furthermore, the conductive oligomer is more conductive than the insulators as defined herein. Additionally, the conductive oligomers of the invention are to be distinguished from electroactive polymers, that themselves may donate or accept electrons. A variety of conductive oligomers are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,740,518, hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
- the monolayer may comprise insulator moieties.
- insulator herein is meant a substantially nonconducting oligomer, preferably linear.
- substantially nonconducting herein is meant that the insulator will not transfer electrons at 100 Hz. The rate of electron transfer through the insulator is preferably slower than the rate through the conductive oligomers described herein.
- the monolayer may comprise different insulatory species, although preferably the different species are chosen such that a reasonably uniform SAM can be formed.
- the different insulators may be done to facilitate monolayer formation, or to make monolayers with altered properties.
- some of the terminal groups may facilitate detection, and some may prevent non-specific binding.
- the insulators have a conductivity, S, of about 10 ⁇ 7 ⁇ ⁇ 1 cm ⁇ 1 or lower, with less than about 10 ⁇ 8 ⁇ ⁇ 1 cm ⁇ 1 being preferred. See generally Gardner et al., supra.
- insulators are alkyl or heteroalkyl oligomers or moieties with sigma bonds, although any particular insulator molecule may contain aromatic groups or one or more conjugated bonds.
- heteroalkyl herein is meant an alkyl group that has at least one heteroatom, e.g. nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon or boron included in the chain.
- Suitable insulators include, but are not limited to, —(CH 2 ) n —, —(CRH) n —, and —(CR 2 ) n —, ethylene glycol or derivatives using other heteroatoms in place of oxygen, e.g. nitrogen or sulfur (sulfur derivatives are not preferred when the electrode is gold).
- the insulators may be substituted with R groups as defined herein to alter the packing of the moieties on an electrode, the hydrophilicity or hydrophobicity of the insulator, and the flexibility, e.g. the rotational, torsional or longitudinal flexibility of the insulator.
- R groups as defined herein to alter the packing of the moieties on an electrode, the hydrophilicity or hydrophobicity of the insulator, and the flexibility, e.g. the rotational, torsional or longitudinal flexibility of the insulator.
- branched alkyl groups may be used.
- the insulators may contain terminal groups, as outlined above, particularly to influence the surface of the monolayer.
- aromatic group or grammatical equivalents herein is meant an aromatic monocyclic or polycyclic hydrocarbon moiety generally containing 5 to 14 carbon atoms (although larger polycyclic rings structures may be made) and any carbocylic ketone or thioketone derivative thereof, wherein the carbon atom with the free valence is a member of an aromatic ring.
- Aromatic groups include arylene groups and aromatic groups with more than two atoms removed. For the purposes of this application aromatic includes heterocycle.
- Heterocycle or “heteroaryl” means an aromatic group wherein 1 to 5 of the indicated carbon atoms are replaced by a heteroatom chosen from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, boron and silicon wherein the atom with the free valence is a member of an aromatic ring, and any heterocyclic ketone and thioketone derivative thereof.
- heterocycle includes thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, pyrimidinyl, oxalyl, indolyl, purinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, thiazolyl, imidozyl, etc.
- the Y aromatic groups may be different, e.g. a heterooligomer. That is, an oligomer may comprise an oligomer of a single type of Y groups, or of multiple types of Y groups.
- the aromatic group may be substituted with a substitution group, generally depicted herein as R.
- R groups may be added as necessary to affect the packing of the insulator, e.g. R groups may be used to alter the association of the oligomers in the monolayer. R groups may also be added to 1) alter the solubility of the oligomer or of compositions containing the oligomers; 2) alter the conjugation or electrochemical potential of the system; and 3) alter the charge or characteristics at the surface of the monolayer.
- R groups are preferred to increase solubility when solution synthesis is done.
- the R groups, and their positions, are chosen to minimally affect the packing of the insulator on a surface, particularly within a monolayer, as described below.
- only small R groups are used within the monolayer, with larger R groups generally above the surface of the monolayer.
- attachment of methyl groups to the portion of the insulator within the monolayer to increase solubility is preferred, with attachment of longer alkoxy groups, for example, C3 to C10, is preferably done above the monolayer surface.
- R groups include, but are not limited to, hydrogen, alkyl, alcohol, aromatic, amino, amido, nitro, ethers, esters, aldehydes, sulfonyl, silicon moieties, halogens, sulfur containing moieties, phosphorus containing moieties, and ethylene glycols.
- R is hydrogen when the position is unsubstituted. It should be noted that some positions may allow two substitution groups, R and R′, in which case the R and R′ groups may be either the same or different.
- alkyl group or grammatical equivalents herein is meant a straight or branched chain alkyl group, with straight chain alkyl groups being preferred. If branched, it may be branched at one or more positions, and unless specified, at any position.
- the alkyl group may range from about 1 to about 30 carbon atoms (C1-C30), with an embodiment utilizing from about 1 to about 20 carbon atoms (C1-C20), with about C1 through about C12 to about C15 being preferred, and C1 to C5 being particularly preferred, although in some embodiments the alkyl group may be much larger.
- alkyl group also included within the definition of an alkyl group are cycloalkyl groups such as C5 and C6 rings, and heterocyclic rings with nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus.
- Alkyl also includes heteroalkyl, with heteroatoms of sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen, and silicone being preferred.
- Alkyl includes substituted alkyl groups.
- substituted alkyl group herein is meant an alkyl group further comprising one or more substitution moieties “R”, as defined above.
- amino groups or grammatical equivalents herein is meant —NH 2 , —NHR and —NR 2 groups, with R being as defined herein.
- nitro group herein is meant an —NO 2 group.
- sulfur containing moieties herein is meant compounds containing sulfur atoms, including but not limited to, thia-, thio- and sulfo-compounds, thiols (—SH and —SR), and sulfides (—RSR—).
- phosphorus containing moieties herein is meant compounds containing phosphorus, including, but not limited to, phosphines and phosphates.
- silicon containing moieties herein is meant compounds containing silicon.
- ether herein is meant an —O—R group. Ethers can include alkoxy groups, with —O—(CH 2 ) 2 CH 3 and —O—(CH 2 ) 4 CH 3 being preferred.
- esters herein is meant a —COOR group.
- halogen herein is meant bromine, iodine, chlorine, or fluorine.
- Substituted alkyls can partially or fully halogenated alkyls such as CF 3 , etc.
- aldehyde herein is meant —RCHO groups.
- alcohol herein is meant —OH groups, and alkyl alcohols —ROH.
- ethylene glycol or “(poly)ethylene glycol” herein is meant a —(O—CH 2 —CH 2 ) n — group, although each carbon atom of the ethylene group may also be singly or doubly substituted, e.g. —(O—CR 2 —CR 2 ) n —, with R as described above.
- Ethylene glycol derivatives with other heteroatoms in place of oxygen e.g. —(N—CH 2 —CH 2 ) n — or —(S—CH 2 —CH 2 ) n —, or with substitution groups
- substitution groups are also preferred.
- Substitution groups can include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, alkoxy groups such as —O—(CH 2 ) 2 CH 3 and —O—(CH 2 ) 4 CH 3 and ethylene glycol and derivatives thereof.
- Aromatic groups can include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, naphthalene, anthracene, phenanthroline, pyrole, pyridine, thiophene, porphyrins, and substituted derivatives of each of these, included fused ring derivatives.
- the insulator species included in the SAM utilizes novel methods and compositions comprising asymmetric disulfides.
- the signals generated from label probes can be dependent on the behavior or properties of the SAM.
- the present invention provides asymmetric insulators based on disulfides, wherein one of the arms being a longer alkyl chain (or other SAM forming species) and the other arm comprising either a shorter alkyl chain or a bulky group, such as a branched alkyl group, that can be polar or nonpolar) for creating the nanoconduits.
- exemplary species and methods of making are described in U.S. Ser. No. 09/847,113. See also Mukaiyama Tetrahedron Lett. 1968, 5907; Boustany Tetrahedron Lett. 1970 3547; Harpp Tetrahedron Lett. 1970 3551; and Oae, J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun, 1977, 407, all of which are expressly incorporated herein by reference.
- the length of the species making up the monolayer will vary as needed. As outlined above, it appears that hybridization is more efficient at a distance from the surface.
- the species to which nucleic acids are attached can be basically the same length as the monolayer forming species or longer than them, resulting in the nucleic acids being more accessible to the solvent for hybridization.
- Two component systems utilize a first species comprising a capture probe containing species, attached to the electrode via either an insulator.
- the second species are insulators.
- the first species can comprise from about 90% to about 1%, with from about 20% to about 40% being preferred.
- the second species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 20% to about 90% being preferred, and from about 40% to about 60% being especially preferred.
- the third species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 20% to about 40% being preferred, and from about 15% to about 30% being especially preferred.
- preferred ratios of first:second:third species in SAM formation solvents are 2:2:1 for short targets, 1:3:1 for longer targets, with total thiol concentration (when used to attach these species, as is more fully outlined below) in the 500 ⁇ M to 1 mM range, and 833 ⁇ M being preferred.
- the two components are the first and second species.
- the first species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 1% to about 40% being preferred, and from about 10% to about 40% being especially preferred.
- the second species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 10% to about 60% being preferred, and from about 20% to about 40% being especially preferred.
- the two components are the first and the third species.
- the first species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 1% to about 40% being preferred, and from about 10% to about 40% being especially preferred.
- the second species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 10% to about 60% being preferred, and from about 20% to about 40% being especially preferred.
- the deposition of the SAM is done using aqueous solvents.
- aqueous solvents As is generally described in Steel et al., Anal. Chem. 70:4670 (1998), Herne et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 119:8916 (1997), and Finklea, Electrochemistry of Organized Monolayers of Thiols and Related Molecules on Electrodes, from A. J. Bard, Electroanalytical Chemistry: A Series of Advances , Vol. 20, Dekker N.Y. 1966-, all of which are expressly incorporated by reference, the deposition of the SAM-forming species can be done out of aqueous solutions, frequently comprising salt.
- the covalent attachment of the insulators may be accomplished in a variety of ways, depending on the electrode and the composition of the insulators used.
- the attachment linkers with covalently attached nucleosides or nucleic acids as depicted herein are covalently attached to an electrode.
- one end or terminus of the attachment linker is attached to the nucleoside or nucleic acid, and the other is attached to an electrode.
- attachment linker may be attached at two sites to the electrode, as is generally depicted in Structures 2-4.
- some type of linker is used, as depicted below as “A” in Structure 1, where “X” is A a conductive oligomer, “I” is an insulator and the hatched surface is the electrode:
- A is a linker or atom.
- A may be a sulfur moiety when a gold electrode is used.
- A may be a silicon (silane) moiety attached to the oxygen of the oxide (see for example Chen et al., Langmuir 10:3332-3337 (1994); Lenhard et al., J. Electroanal. Chem. 78:195-201 (1977), both of which are expressly incorporated by reference).
- A may be an amino moiety (preferably a primary amine; see for example Deinhammer et al., Langmuir 10:1306-1313 (1994)).
- a moieties include, but are not limited to, silane moieties, sulfur moieties (including alkyl sulfur moieties), and amino moieties.
- epoxide type linkages with redox polymers such as are known in the art are not used.
- insulators may be attached to the electrode with more than one “A” moiety; the “A” moieties may be the same or different.
- A when the electrode is a gold electrode, and “A” is a sulfur atom or moiety, multiple sulfur atoms may be used to attach an insulator to the electrode, such as is generally depicted below in Structures 2, 3 and 4.
- the A moiety is just a sulfur atom, but substituted sulfur moieties may also be used.
- conductive oligomers as the attachment linkers, or provide an option as a conductive oligomer or insulator (e.g. “X or I”), but insulators such as alkyl chains are preferred in many embodiments.
- insulator terminating in a single carbon atom with three sulfur moities attached to the electrode may also comprise a “Q” terminal group.
- the electrode is a gold electrode, and attachment is via a sulfur linkage as is well known in the art, e.g. the A moiety is a sulfur atom or moiety. Although the exact characteristics of the gold-sulfur attachment are not known, this linkage is considered covalent for the purposes of this invention.
- a representative structure is depicted in Structure 5.
- any of the insulators may also comprise terminal groups as described herein.
- Structure 5 depicts the “A” linker as comprising just a sulfur atom, although additional atoms may be present (e.g. substitution groups).
- Structure 5 shows the sulfur atom attached to the Y aromatic group, but as will be appreciated by those in the art, it may be attached to the B-D group (e.g. an acetylene) as well.
- the electrode is a carbon electrode, e.g. a glassy carbon electrode, and attachment is via a nitrogen of an amine group.
- a representative structure is depicted in Structure 6. Again, additional atoms may be present, e.g. Z type linkers and/or terminal groups.
- the oxygen atom is from the oxide of the metal oxide electrode.
- the Si atom may be combined with other atoms, e.g. be a silicon moiety containing substitution groups.
- Other attachments for SAMs to other electrodes are known in the art; see for example Napier et al., Langmuir, 1997, for attachment to indium tin oxide electrodes, and also the chemisorption of phosphates to an indium tin oxide electrode (talk by H. Holden Thorpe, CHI conference, May 4-5, 1998).
- the SAMs of the invention can be made in a variety of ways, including deposition out of organic solutions and deposition out of aqueous solutions.
- the methods outlined herein use a gold electrode as the example, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, other metals and methods may be used as well.
- ITO indium-tin-oxide
- a gold surface is first cleaned.
- cleaning procedures may be employed, including, but not limited to, chemical cleaning or etchants including Piranha solution (hydrogen peroxide/sulfuric acid) or aqua regia (hydrochloric acid/nitric acid), electrochemical methods, flame treatment, plasma treatment or combinations thereof.
- the gold substrate is exposed to the SAM species.
- the SAM species are phosphonate-containing species.
- This can also be done in a variety of ways, including, but not limited to, solution deposition, gas phase deposition, microcontact printing, spray deposition, deposition using neat components, etc.
- An embodiment utilizes a deposition solution comprising a mixture of various SAM species in solution, generally thiol-containing species. Mixed monolayers that contain nucleic acids are usually prepared using a two step procedure.
- the thiolated nucleic acid is deposited during the first deposition step (generally in the presence of at least one other monolayer-forming species) and the mixed monolayer formation is completed during the second step in which a second thiol solution minus nucleic acid is added.
- a second step utilizing mild heating to promote monolayer reorganization.
- the deposition solution is an organic deposition solution.
- a clean gold surface is placed into a clean vial.
- a binding ligand deposition solution in organic solvent is prepared in which the total thiol concentration is between micromolar to saturation; preferred ranges include from about 1 ⁇ M to 10 mM, with from about 400 uM to about 1.0 mM being especially preferred.
- the deposition solution contains thiol modified DNA (e.g. nucleic acid attached to an attachment linker) and thiol diluent molecules.
- the ratio of nucleic acid to diluent (if present) is usually between 1000:1 to 1:1000, with from about 10:1 to about 1:10 being preferred and 1:1 being especially preferred.
- Solvents can be tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitrile, dimethylforamide (DMF), ethanol, or mixtures thereof; generally any solvent of sufficient polarity to dissolve the capture ligand can be used, as long as the solvent is devoid of functional groups that will react with the surface.
- Sufficient nucleic acid deposition solution is added to the vial so as to completely cover the electrode surface.
- the gold substrate is allowed to incubate at ambient temperature or slightly above ambient temperature for a period of time ranging from seconds to hours, with 5-30 minutes being preferred.
- the deposition solution is removed and a solution of diluent molecule only (from about 1 ⁇ M to 10 mM, with from about 100 uM to about 1.0 mM being preferred) in organic solvent is added.
- the gold substrate is allowed to incubate at room temperature or above room temperature for a period of time (seconds to days, with from about 10 minutes to about 24 hours being preferred).
- the gold sample is removed from the solution, rinsed in clean solvent and used.
- an aqueous deposition solution is used.
- a clean gold surface is placed into a clean vial.
- a nucleic acid deposition solution in water is prepared in which the total thiol concentration is between about 1 uM and 10 mM, with from about 1 ⁇ M to about 200 uM being preferred.
- the aqueous solution frequently has salt present (up to saturation, with approximately 1M being preferred), however pure water can be used.
- the deposition solution contains thiol modified nucleic acid and often a thiol diluent molecule.
- the ratio of nucleic acid to diluent is usually between 1000:1 to 1:1000, with from about 10:1 to about 1:10 being preferred and 1:1 being especially preferred.
- the nucleic acid deposition solution is added to the vial in such a volume so as to completely cover the electrode surface.
- the gold substrate is allowed to incubate at ambient temperature or slightly above ambient temperature for 1-30 minutes with 5 minutes usually being sufficient. After the initial incubation, the deposition solution is removed and a solution of diluent molecule only (10 uM-1.0 mM) in either water or organic solvent is added. The gold substrate is allowed to incubate at room temperature or above room temperature until a complete monolayer is formed (10 minutes-24 hours). The gold sample is removed from the solution, rinsed in clean solvent and used.
- the deposition solution comprises a zwitterionic compound, preferably betaine.
- Preferred embodiments utilize betaine and Tris-HCl buffers.
- a circuit board is used as the substrate for the gold electrodes. Formation of the SAMs on the gold surface is generally done by first cleaning the boards, for example in a 10% sulfuric acid solution for 30 seconds, detergent solutions, aqua regia, plasma, etc., as outlined herein. Following the sulfuric acid treatment, the boards are washed, for example via immersion in two Milli-Q water baths for 1 minute each. The boards are then dried, for example under a stream of nitrogen. Spotting of the deposition solution onto the boards is done using any number of known spotting systems, generally by placing the boards on an X-Y table, preferably in a humidity chamber.
- the size of the spotting drop will vary with the size of the electrodes on the boards and the equipment used for delivery of the solution; for example, for 250 ⁇ M size electrodes, a 30 nanoliter drop is used. The volume should be sufficient to cover the electrode surface completely.
- the drop is incubated at room temperature for a period of time (sec to overnight, with 5 minutes preferred) and then the drop is removed by rinsing in a Milli-Q water bath.
- the boards are then optionally treated with a second deposition solution, generally comprising insulator in organic solvent, preferably acetonitrile, by immersion in a 45° C. bath. After 30 minutes, the boards are removed and immersed in an acetonitrile bath for 30 seconds followed by a milli-Q water bath for 30 seconds.
- the boards are dried under a stream of nitrogen. Preferably, only the water rinse is employed.
- the detection electrode comprising the SAM further comprises capture binding ligands, preferably covalently attached.
- binding ligand or “binding species” herein is meant a compound that is used to probe for the presence of the target analyte that will bind to the target analyte.
- binding ligands used per target analyte molecule; a “capture” or “anchor” binding ligand (also referred to herein as a “capture probe”, particularly in reference to a nucleic acid binding ligand) that is attached to the detection electrode as described herein, and a soluble binding ligand (frequently referred to herein as a “signaling probe” or a “label probe”), that binds independently to the target analyte, and either directly or indirectly comprises at least one ETM.
- a “capture” or “anchor” binding ligand also referred to herein as a “capture probe”, particularly in reference to a nucleic acid binding ligand
- a soluble binding ligand frequently referred to herein as a “signaling probe” or a “label probe”
- the target sequence is generally amplified, and during amplification, a label is added; thus these systems generally comprise only two elements, the capture probe and the labeled target.
- the discussion below is directed to the use of electrodes and electrochemical detection, but as will be appreciated by those in the art, fluorescent based systems can be used as well.
- the capture binding ligand allows the attachment of a target analyte to the detection electrode, for the purposes of detection.
- attachment of the target analyte to the capture binding ligand may be direct (e.g. the target analyte binds to the capture binding ligand) or indirect (one or more capture extender ligands may be used).
- the binding is specific, and the binding ligand is part of a binding pair.
- specifically bind herein is meant that the ligand binds the analyte, with specificity sufficient to differentiate between the analyte and other components or contaminants of the test sample.
- the systems may use different binding ligands, for example an array of different ligands, and detection of any particular analyte is via its “signature” of binding to a panel of binding ligands, similar to the manner in which “electronic noses” work.
- the binding should be sufficient to allow the analyte to remain bound under the conditions of the assay, including wash steps to remove non-specific binding.
- the binding constants of the analyte to the binding ligand will be at least about 10 ⁇ 4 to 10 ⁇ 9 M ⁇ 1 , with at least about 10 ⁇ 5 to 10 ⁇ 9 being preferred and at least about 10 ⁇ 7 to 10 ⁇ 9 M ⁇ 1 being particularly preferred.
- the composition of the binding ligand will depend on the composition of the target analyte. Binding ligands to a wide variety of analytes are known or can be readily found using known techniques. For example, when the analyte is a single-stranded nucleic acid, the binding ligand is generally a substantially complementary nucleic acid. Alternatively, as is generally described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,270,163, 5,475,096, 5,567,588, 5,595,877, 5,637,459, 5,683,867, 5,705,337, and related patents, hereby incorporated by reference, nucleic acid “aptamers” can be developed for binding to virtually any target analyte.
- the analyte may be a nucleic acid binding protein and the capture binding ligand is either a single-stranded or double-stranded nucleic acid; alternatively, the binding ligand may be a nucleic acid binding protein when the analyte is a single or double-stranded nucleic acid.
- the binding ligands include proteins (particularly including antibodies or fragments thereof (FAbs, etc.)), small molecules, or aptamers, described above. Binding ligands can include proteins include peptides.
- suitable binding ligands include substrates, inhibitors, and other proteins that bind the enzyme, e.g.
- any two molecules that will associate, preferably specifically, may be used, either as the analyte or the binding ligand.
- Suitable analyte/binding ligand pairs include, but are not limited to, antibodies/antigens, receptors/ligand, proteins/nucleic acids; nucleic acids/nucleic acids, enzymes/substrates and/or inhibitors, carbohydrates (including glycoproteins and glycolipids)/lectins, carbohydrates and other binding partners, proteins/proteins; and protein/small molecules. These may be wild-type or derivative sequences.
- the binding ligands are portions (particularly the extracellular portions) of cell surface receptors that are known to multimerize, such as the growth hormone receptor, glucose transporters (particularly GLUT4 receptor), transferrin receptor, epidermal growth factor receptor, low density lipoprotein receptor, high density lipoprotein receptor, leptin receptor, interleukin receptors including IL-1, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-11, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15 and IL-17 receptors, VEGF receptor, PDGF receptor, EPO receptor, TPO receptor, ciliary neurotrophic factor receptor, prolactin receptor, and T-cell receptors.
- cell surface receptors such as the growth hormone receptor, glucose transporters (particularly GLUT4 receptor), transferrin receptor, epidermal growth factor receptor, low density lipoprotein receptor, high density lipoprotein receptor, leptin receptor, interleukin receptors including IL-1, IL-2,
- compositions and techniques are outlined in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,591,578; 5,824,473; 5,705,348; 5,780,234 and 5,770,369; U.S. Ser. Nos. 08/873,598 08/911,589; WO 98/20162; WO98/12430; WO98/57158; WO 00/16089) WO99/57317; WO99/67425; WO00/24941; PCT US00/10903; WO00/38836; WO99/37819; WO99/57319 and PCTUS00/20476; and related materials, all of which are expressly incorporated by reference in their entirety.
- the method of attachment of the capture binding ligands to the attachment linker will generally be done as is known in the art, and will depend on both the composition of the attachment linker and the capture binding ligand.
- the capture binding ligands are attached to the attachment linker through the use of functional groups on each that can then be used for attachment.
- Functional groups for attachment can be amino groups, carboxy groups, oxo groups and thiol groups. These functional groups can then be attached, either directly or indirectly through the use of a linker, sometimes depicted herein as “Z”.
- Linkers are well known in the art; for example, homo- or hetero-bifunctional linkers as are well known (see 1994 Pierce Chemical Company catalog, technical section on cross-linkers, pages 155-200, incorporated herein by reference).
- Z linkers can include, but are not limited to, alkyl groups (including substituted alkyl groups and alkyl groups containing heteroatom moieties), with short alkyl groups, esters, amide, amine, epoxy groups and ethylene glycol and derivatives being preferred, with propyl, acetylene, and C 2 alkene being especially preferred.
- Z may also be a sulfone group, forming sulfonamide linkages.
- capture binding ligands comprising proteins, lectins, nucleic acids, small organic molecules, carbohydrates, etc. can be added.
- An embodiment utilizes proteinaceous capture binding ligands.
- any number of techniques may be used to attach a proteinaceous capture binding ligand to an attachment linker.
- a wide variety of techniques are known to add moieties to proteins.
- An embodiment utilizes nucleic acids as the capture binding ligand. While most of the following discussion focuses on nucleic acids, as will be appreciated by those in the art, many of the techniques outlined below apply in a similar manner to non-nucleic acid systems as well, and to systems that rely on attachment to surfaces other than metal electrodes.
- the capture probe nucleic acid is covalently attached to the electrode, via an “attachment linker”, that can be an insulator.
- an “attachment linker” that can be an insulator.
- covalently attached herein is meant that two moieties are attached by at least one bond, including sigma bonds, pi bonds and coordination bonds.
- nucleic acid or other binding ligand
- the other end is attached to the electrode.
- any of the structures depicted herein may further comprise a nucleic acid effectively as a terminal group.
- the present invention provides compositions comprising nucleic acids covalently attached to electrodes as is generally depicted below in Structure 8:
- X is a conductive oligomer and I is an insulator as defined herein.
- F 1 is a linkage that allows the covalent attachment of the electrode and the insulator, including bonds, atoms or linkers such as is described herein, for example as “A”, defined below.
- F 2 is a linkage that allows the covalent attachment of the insulator to the nucleic acid, and may be a bond, an atom or a linkage as is herein described.
- F 2 may be part of the insulator, part of the nucleic acid, or exogeneous to both, for example, as defined herein for “Z”.
- the capture probe nucleic acid is covalently attached to the electrode via an attachment linker.
- the covalent attachment of the nucleic acid and the attachment linker may be accomplished in several ways.
- the attachment is via attachment to the base of the nucleoside, via attachment to the backbone of the nucleic acid (either the ribose, the phosphate, or to an analogous group of a nucleic acid analog backbone), or via a transition metal ligand, as described below.
- the techniques outlined below are generally described for naturally occurring nucleic acids, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, similar techniques may be used with nucleic acid analogs, and in some cases with other binding ligands.
- most of the structures herein depict conductive oligomers as the attachment linkers, but insulators such as alkyl chains are preferred in many embodiments.
- the attachment linker is attached to the base of a nucleoside of the nucleic acid. This may be done in several ways, depending on the linker, as is described below.
- the linker is attached to a terminal nucleoside, e.g. either the 3′ or 5′ nucleoside of the nucleic acid.
- the linker is attached to an internal nucleoside.
- the point of attachment to the base will vary with the base. Generally, attachment at any position is possible. In some embodiments, for example when the probe containing the ETMs may be used for hybridization, it is preferred to attach at positions not involved in hydrogen bonding to the complementary base. Thus, for example, generally attachment is to the 5 or 6 position of pyrimidines such as uridine, cytosine and thymine. For purines such as adenine and guanine, the linkage is preferably via the 8 position. Attachment to non-standard bases is preferably done at the comparable positions.
- the attachment linker is attached to the ribose of the ribose-phosphate backbone. This may be done in several ways. As is known in the art, nucleosides that are modified at either the 2′ or 3′ position of the ribose with amino groups, sulfur groups, silicone groups, phosphorus groups, or oxo groups can be made (Imazawa et al., J. Org. Chem., 44:2039 (1979); Hobbs et al., J. Org. Chem. 42(4):714 (1977); Verheyden et al., J. Orrg. Chem. 36(2):250 (1971); McGee et al., J. Org. Chem.
- An embodiment utilizes amino-modified nucleosides. These amino-modified riboses can then be used to form either amide or amine linkages to an insulator.
- the amino group is attached directly to the ribose, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, short linkers such as those described herein for “Z” may be present between the amino group and the ribose.
- the present invention provides substrates comprising at least one detection electrode comprising monolayers and capture binding ligands, useful in target analyte detection systems.
- ETMs electron donor moiety
- ETMs electron acceptor moiety
- ETMs electron acceptor moiety
- ETMs electron transfer compounds
- electron donor and acceptor capabilities are relative; that is, a molecule which can lose an electron under certain experimental conditions will be able to accept an electron under different experimental conditions.
- ETMs can include, but are not limited to, transition metal complexes, organic ETMs, and electrodes.
- the ETMs are transition metal complexes. Transition metals are those whose atoms have a partial or complete d shell of electrons. Suitable transition metals for use in the invention include, but are not limited to, cadmium (Cd), copper (Cu), cobalt (Co), palladium (Pd), zinc (Zn), iron (Fe), ruthenium (Ru), rhodium (Rh), osmium (Os), rhenium (Re), platinium (Pt), scandium (Sc), titanium (Ti), Vanadium (V), chromium (Cr), manganese (Mn), nickel (Ni), Molybdenum (Mo), technetium (Tc), tungsten (W), and iridium (Ir).
- the first series of transition metals the platinum metals (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir and Pt), along with Fe, Re, W, Mo and Tc, are preferred.
- Particularly preferred are ruthenium, rhenium, osmium, platinium, cobalt and iron.
- L are the co-ligands, that provide the coordination atoms for the binding of the metal ion.
- the number and nature of the co-ligands will depend on the coordination number of the metal ion.
- Mono-, di- or polydentate co-ligands may be used at any position.
- r may range from zero (when all coordination atoms are provided by the other two ligands) to four, when all the co-ligands are monodentate.
- r will be from 0 to 8, depending on the coordination number of the metal ion and the choice of the other ligands.
- the metal ion has a coordination number of six and both the ligand attached to the insulator and the ligand attached to the nucleic acid are at least bidentate; that is, r is preferably zero, one (e.g. the remaining co-ligand is bidentate) or two (two monodentate co-ligands are used).
- the co-ligands can be the same or different. Suitable ligands fall into two categories: ligands which use nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, carbon or phosphorus atoms (depending on the metal ion) as the coordination atoms (generally referred to in the literature as sigma ( ⁇ ) donors) and organometallic ligands such as metallocene ligands (generally referred to in the literature as pi ( ⁇ ) donors, and depicted herein as L m ).
- Suitable nitrogen donating ligands are well known in the art and include, but are not limited to, NH 2 ; NHR; NRR′; pyridine; pyrazine; isonicotinamide; imidazole; bipyridine and substituted derivatives of bipyridine; terpyridine and substituted derivatives; phenanthrolines, particularly 1,10-phenanthroline (abbreviated phen) and substituted derivatives of phenanthrolines such as 4,7-dimethylphenanthroline and dipyridol[3,2-a:2′,3′-c]phenazine (abbreviated dppz); dipyridophenazine; 1,4,5,8,9,12-hexaazatriphenylene (abbreviated hat); 9,10-phenanthrenequinone diimine (abbreviated phi); 1,4,5,8-tetraazaphenanthrene (abbreviated tap); 1,4,8,11-tetra-azacyclotetradecane (abbrevi
- Substituted derivatives including fused derivatives, may also be used.
- porphyrins and substituted derivatives of the porphyrin family may be used. See for example, Comprehensive Coordination Chemistry, Ed. Wilkinson et al., Pergammon Press, 1987, Chapters 13.2 (pp73-98), 21.1 (pp. 813-898) and 21.3 (pp 915-957), all of which are hereby expressly incorporated by reference.
- Suitable sigma donating ligands using carbon, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus are known in the art.
- suitable sigma carbon donors are found in Cotton and Wilkenson, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1988, hereby incorporated by reference; see page 38, for example.
- suitable oxygen ligands include crown ethers, water and others known in the art.
- Phosphines and substituted phosphines are also suitable; see page 38 of Cotton and Wilkenson.
- oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus and nitrogen-donating ligands are attached in such a manner as to allow the heteroatoms to serve as coordination atoms.
- organometallic ligands are used.
- transition metal organometallic compounds with ⁇ -bonded organic ligands see Advanced Inorganic Chemistry, 5th Ed., Cotton & Wilkinson, John Wiley & Sons, 1988, chapter 26; Organometallics, A Concise Introduction, Elschenbroich et al., 2nd Ed., 1992, VCH; and Comprehensive Organometallic Chemistry II, A Review of the Literature 1982-1994, Abel et al. Ed., Vol.
- organometallic ligands include cyclic aromatic compounds such as the cyclopentadienide ion [C 5 H 5 ( ⁇ 1)] and various ring substituted and ring fused derivatives, such as the indenylide ( ⁇ 1) ion, that yield a class of bis(cyclopentadieyl) metal compounds, (e.g. the metallocenes); see for example Robins et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 104:1882-1893 (1982); and Gassman et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 108:4228-4229 (1986), incorporated by reference.
- cyclic aromatic compounds such as the cyclopentadienide ion [C 5 H 5 ( ⁇ 1)]
- various ring substituted and ring fused derivatives such as the indenylide ( ⁇ 1) ion
- ferrocene [(C 5 H 5 ) 2 Fe] and its derivatives are prototypical examples which have been used in a wide variety of chemical (Connelly et al., Chem. Rev. 96:877-910 (1996), incorporated by reference) and electrochemical (Geiger et al., Advances in Organometallic Chemistry 23:1-93; and Geiger et al., Advances in Organometallic Chemistry 24:87, incorporated by reference) electron transfer or “redox” reactions.
- Metallocene derivatives of a variety of the first, second and third row transition metals are potential candidates as redox moieties that are covalently attached to either the ribose ring or the nucleoside base of nucleic acid.
- organometallic ligands include cyclic arenes such as benzene, to yield bis(arene)metal compounds and their ring substituted and ring fused derivatives, of which bis(benzene)chromium is a prototypical example
- Other acyclic ⁇ -bonded ligands such as the allyl( ⁇ 1) ion, or butadiene yield potentially suitable organometallic compounds, and all such ligands, in conjuction with other ⁇ -bonded and ⁇ -bonded ligands constitute the general class of organometallic compounds in which there is a metal to carbon bond. Electrochemical studies of various dimers and oligomers of such compounds with bridging organic ligands, and additional non-bridging ligands, as well as with and without metal-metal bonds are potential candidate redox moieties in nucleic acid analysis.
- the ligand is generally attached via one of the carbon atoms of the organometallic ligand, although attachment may be via other atoms for heterocyclic ligands.
- Preferred organometallic ligands include metallocene ligands, including substituted derivatives and the metalloceneophanes (see page 1174 of Cotton and Wilkenson, supra).
- derivatives of metallocene ligands such as methylcyclopentadienyl, with multiple methyl groups being preferred, such as pentamethylcyclopentadienyl, can be used to increase the stability of the metallocene.
- only one of the two metallocene ligands of a metallocene are derivatized.
- attachment linkers such as alkyl groups may also be utilized.
- the ligands used in the invention show altered fluorescent properties depending on the redox state of the chelated metal ion. As described below, this thus serves as an additional mode of detection of electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode.
- the ligand attached to the nucleic acid is an amino group attached to the 2′ or 3′ position of a ribose of the ribose-phosphate backbone.
- This ligand may contain a multiplicity of amino groups so as to form a polydentate ligand which binds the metal ion.
- Other ligands can include cyclopentadiene and phenanthroline.
- the capture probe nucleic acids are covalently attached to the electrode via an insulator (e.g. the attachment linker is an insulator).
- an insulator e.g. the attachment linker is an insulator.
- the attachment of nucleic acids (and other binding ligands) to insulators such as alkyl groups is well known, and can be done to the base or the backbone, including the ribose or phosphate for backbones containing these moieties, or to alternate backbones for nucleic acid analogs.
- different capture probes, or one capture probe with a multiplicity of different capture extender probes can be used.
- auxillary capture probes that comprise relatively short probe sequences, that can be used to “tack down” components of the system, for example the recruitment linkers, to increase the concentration of ETMs at the surface.
- a number of capture probes are designed and used for each target sequence. That is, a single electrode pad of the array may have 1 probe to the target analyte, or a plurality of probes to the same target sequence, preferably (but not required to be) non-overlapping. This is particularly preferred for long target sequences. In this embodiment, at least two different capture probes are used, with at least 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 being preferred, and 8 being particularly preferred.
- biomarkers are measured on a chip separate from that used to measure the nucleic acid biomarkers.
- biomarkers are measured on the same platform, such as on one chip.
- biomarkers are measured using different platforms and/or different experimental runs.
- the compositions further comprise a solution or soluble binding ligand.
- Solution binding ligands are similar to capture binding ligands, in that they bind, preferably specifically, to target analytes.
- the solution binding ligand (generally referred to herein as label probes when the target analytes are nucleic acids) may be the same or different from the capture binding ligand.
- the solution binding ligands are not directly attached to the surface.
- the solution binding ligand either directly comprises a recruitment linker that comprises at least one ETM (FIG. 4A from 60/190,259), or the recruitment linker binds, either directly or indirectly, to the solution binding ligand.
- solution binding ligands or “soluble binding ligands” or “signal carriers” or “label probes” or “label binding ligands” with recruitment linkers comprising covalently attached ETMs are provided. That is, one portion of the label probe or solution binding ligand directly or indirectly binds to the target analyte, and one portion comprises a recruitment linker comprising covalently attached ETMs. In some systems, these may be the same. Similarly, the recruitment linker comprises nucleic acid that will hybridize to detection probes.
- Preferred ETMs comprise metallocenes, particularly ferrocene or ferrocene derivatives ( FIG. 1 ).
- Preferred ferrocene derivatives can be N6 ( FIG. 1D ), QW56 ( FIG. 2A ), and QW80 ( FIG. 2B ).
- organic electron donors and acceptors may be covalently attached to the nucleic acid for use in the invention.
- organic molecules include, but are not limited to, riboflavin, xanthene dyes, azine dyes, acridine orange, N,N′-dimethyl-2,7-diazapyrenium dichloride (DAP 2+ ), methylviologen, ethidium bromide, quinones such as N,N′-dimethylanthra(2,1,9-def:6,5,10-d′e′f′)diisoquinoline dichloride (ADIQ 2+ ); porphyrins ([meso-tetrakis(N-methyl-x-pyridinium)porphyrin tetrachloride], varlamine blue B hydrochloride, Bindschedler's green; 2,6-dichloroindophenol, 2,6-dibromophenolindophenol; Brilliant crest
- the electron donors and acceptors are redox proteins as are known in the art. However, redox proteins in many embodiments are not preferred.
- ETMs can include are metallocenes, with ferrocene or ferrocene derivatives being particularly preferred.
- hydrophobic ETMs used with hydrophobic SAMs give rise to better (greater) signals than ETMs that are charged or more hydrophilic.
- ferrocene in solution can penetrate the monolayers of the examples and give a signal when electroconduits are present, while ferrocyanide in solution gives little or no signal.
- hydrophobic ETMs are preferred in some embodiments; however, transition metal complexes, although charged, with one or more hydrophobic ligands, such as Ru and Os complexes, also give rise to good signals.
- the ETM and the electrode are facilitated by the use of linkers or spacers that allow the ETM some flexibility to penetrate into the monolayer; thus the N6 compositions of the invention have a four carbon linker attaching the ETM to the nucleic acid.
- a plurality of ETMs is used.
- the use of multiple ETMs provides signal amplification and thus allows more sensitive detection limits.
- the use of multiple ETMs on nucleic acids that hybridize to complementary strands can cause decreases in T m s of the hybridization complexes depending on the number, site of attachment and spacing between the multiple ETMs, this is not a factor when the ETMs are on the recruitment linker, since this does not hybridize to a complementary sequence.
- pluralities of ETMs are preferred, with at least about 2 ETMs per recruitment linker being preferred, and at least about 10 being particularly preferred, and at least about 20 to 50 being especially preferred. In some instances, very large numbers of ETMs (100 to 1000) can be used.
- the portion of the label probe (or target, in some embodiments) that comprises the ETMs can be nucleic acid, or it can be a non-nucleic acid linker that links the first hybridizable portion of the label probe to the ETMs. That is, since this portion of the label probe is not required for hybridization, it need not be nucleic acid, although this may be done for ease of synthesis.
- the recruitment linker may comprise double-stranded portions.
- the recruitment linker is nucleic acid (including analogs), and attachment of the ETMs can be via (1) a base; (2) the backbone, including the ribose, the phosphate, or comparable structures in nucleic acid analogs; (3) nucleoside replacement, described below; or (4) metallocene polymers, as described below.
- the recruitment linker is non-nucleic acid, and can be either a metallocene polymer or an alkyl-type polymer (including heteroalkyl, as is more fully described below) containing ETM substitution groups.
- the recruitment linker is a nucleic acid, and comprises covalently attached ETMs.
- the ETMs may be attached to nucleosides within the nucleic acid in a variety of positions.
- Embodiments can include, but are not limited to, (1) attachment to the base of the nucleoside, (2) attachment of the ETM as a base replacement, (3) attachment to the backbone of the nucleic acid, including either to a ribose of the ribose-phosphate backbone or to a phosphate moiety, or to analogous structures in nucleic acid analogs, and (4) attachment via metallocene polymers, with the latter being preferred.
- the recruitment linker is nucleic acid
- secondary label probes that have a first portion that will hybridize to a portion of the primary label probes and a second portion comprising a recruitment linker as is defined herein. This is generally depicted in FIG. 16H of U.S. Ser. No. 60/190,259.
- the ETM is attached to the base of a nucleoside as is generally outlined above for attachment of the attachment linkers. Attachment can be to an internal nucleoside or a terminal nucleoside.
- the covalent attachment to the base will depend in part on the ETM chosen. Attachment may generally be done to any position of the base.
- the ETM is a transition metal complex, and thus attachment of a suitable metal ligand to the base leads to the covalent attachment of the ETM.
- similar types of linkages may be used for the attachment of organic ETMs, as will be appreciated by those in the art.
- the C4 attached amino group of cytosine, the C6 attached amino group of adenine, or the C2 attached amino group of guanine may be used as a transition metal ligand.
- Ligands containing aromatic groups can be attached via acetylene linkages as is known in the art (see Comprehensive Organic Synthesis, Trost et al., Ed., Pergamon Press, Chapter 2.4: Coupling Reactions Between sp 2 and sp Carbon Centers, Sonogashira, pp521-549, and pp950-953, hereby incorporated by reference).
- Structure 9 depicts a representative structure in the presence of the metal ion and any other necessary ligands;
- Structure 30 depicts uridine, although as for all the structures herein, any other base may also be used.
- L a is a ligand, which may include nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus donating ligands or organometallic ligands such as metallocene ligands.
- Suitable L a ligands include, but are not limited to, phenanthroline, imidazole, bpy and terpy.
- L r and M are as defined above. Again, it will be appreciated by those in the art, that a linker (“Z”) may be included between the nucleoside and the ETM.
- the linkage may be done using a linker, which may utilize an amide linkage (see generally Telser et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 111:7221-7226 (1989); Telser et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 111:7226-7232 (1989), both of which are expressly incorporated by reference).
- a linker which may utilize an amide linkage (see generally Telser et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 111:7221-7226 (1989); Telser et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 111:7226-7232 (1989), both of which are expressly incorporated by reference).
- amide linkage see generally Telser et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 111:7221-7226 (1989); Telser et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 111:7226-7232 (1989), both of which are expressly
- L is a ligand as defined above, with L r and M as defined above as well.
- L is amino, phen, byp and terpy.
- the ETM attached to a nucleoside is a metallocene; e.g. the L and L r of Structure 10 are both metallocene ligands, L m , as described above.
- Structure 11 depicts an embodiment wherein the metallocene is ferrocene, and the base is uridine, although other bases may be used:
- Metallocenes can include ferrocene, cobaltocene and osmiumocene.
- the ETM is attached to a ribose at any position of the ribose-phosphate backbone of the nucleic acid, e.g. either the 5′ or 3′ terminus or any internal nucleoside.
- Ribose in this case can include ribose analogs.
- nucleosides that are modified at either the 2′ or 3′ position of the ribose can be made, with nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus-containing modifications possible. Amino-modified and oxygen-modified ribose is preferred. See generally PCT publication WO 95/15971, incorporated herein by reference.
- modification groups may be used as a transition metal ligand, or as a chemically functional moiety for attachment of other transition metal ligands and organometallic ligands, or organic electron donor moieties as will be appreciated by those in the art.
- a linker such as depicted herein for “Z” may be used as well.
- Embodiments can utilize attachment at the 2′ or 3′ position of the ribose, with the 2′ position being preferred.
- a metallocene serves as the ETM, and is attached via an amide bond as depicted below in Structure 12.
- the examples outline the synthesis of a compound when the metallocene is ferrocene.
- amine linkages are used, as is generally depicted in Structure 13.
- Z is a linker, as defined herein, with 1-16 atoms being preferred, and 2-4 atoms being particularly preferred, and t is either one or zero.
- oxo linkages are used, as is generally depicted in Structure 14.
- Z is a linker, as defined herein, and t is either one or zero.
- an ETM is attached to a phosphate at any position of the ribose-phosphate backbone of the nucleic acid. This may be done in a variety of ways.
- phosphodiester bond analogs such as phosphoramide or phosphoramidite linkages may be incorporated into a nucleic acid, where the heteroatom (e.g. nitrogen) serves as a transition metal ligand (see PCT publication WO 95/15971, incorporated by reference).
- the composition has the structure shown in Structure 15.
- Alkyl-based linkers can be used to create multiple branching structures comprising one or more ETMs at the terminus of each branch (although internal ETMs can be used as well). Generally, this is done by creating branch points containing multiple hydroxy groups, which optionally can then be used to add additional branch points. The terminal hydroxy groups can then be used in phosphoramidite reactions to add ETMs, as is generally done below for the nucleoside replacement and metallocene polymer reactions.
- the branch point can be an internal one or a terminal one, and can be a chemical branch point or a nucleoside branch point.
- an ETM such as a metallocene is used as a “nucleoside replacement”, serving as an ETM.
- the distance between the two cyclopentadiene rings of ferrocene is similar to the orthongonal distance between two bases in a double stranded nucleic acid.
- Other metallocenes in addition to ferrocene may be used, for example, air stable metallocenes such as those containing cobalt or ruthenium.
- metallocene moieties may be incorporated into the backbone of a nucleic acid, as is generally depicted in Structure 16 (nucleic acid with a ribose-phosphate backbone) and Structure 38 (peptide nucleic acid backbone).
- Structures 16 and 17 depict ferrocene, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, other metallocenes may be used as well.
- air stable metallocenes can include metallocenes utilizing ruthenium and cobalt as the metal.
- Z is a linker as defined above, with generally short, alkyl groups, including heteroatoms such as oxygen being preferred. Generally, what is important is the length of the linker, such that minimal perturbations of a double stranded nucleic acid is effected, as is more fully described below. Thus, methylene, ethylene, ethylene glycols, propylene and butylene are all preferred, with ethylene and ethylene glycol being particularly preferred.
- each Z linker may be the same or different.
- Structure 16 depicts a ribose-phosphate backbone, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, nucleic acid analogs may also be used, including ribose analogs and phosphate bond analogs.
- Z groups are as listed above, and again, each Z linker can be the same or different. As above, other nucleic acid analogs may be used as well.
- ETMs in addition to metallocenes, as nucleoside replacements or in polymer embodiments, described below.
- the ETM is a transition metal complex other than a metallocene, comprising one, two or three (or more) ligands
- the ligands can be functionalized as depicted for the ferrocene to allow the addition of phosphoramidite groups.
- Complexes comprising at least two ring (for example, aryl and substituted aryl) ligands can include, where each of the ligands comprises functional groups for attachment via phosphoramidite chemistry.
- this type of reaction creating polymers of ETMs either as a portion of the backbone of the nucleic acid or as “side groups” of the nucleic acids, to allow amplification of the signals generated herein, can be done with virtually any ETM that can be functionalized to contain the correct chemical groups.
- nucleic acid analogs are made; that is, the invention provides nucleic acids having a backbone comprising at least one metallocene.
- a metallocene such as ferrocene (or other ETMs)
- the invention provides nucleic acids having a backbone comprising at least one metallocene.
- nucleic acids having metallocenes attached to the backbone e.g. via a ribose, a phosphate, etc. That is, two nucleic acids each made up of a traditional nucleic acid or analog (nucleic acids in this case including a single nucleoside), may be covalently attached to each other via a metallocene.
- a metallocene derivative or substituted metallocene is provided, wherein each of the two aromatic rings of the metallocene has a nucleic acid substitutent group.
- metallocene polymers that is, there are areas of metallocene polymers within the backbone.
- nucleic acid substituent groups it is also desirable in some instances to add additional substituent groups to one or both of the aromatic rings of the metallocene (or ETM).
- ETM metallocene
- these nucleoside replacements are generally part of probe sequences to be hybridized with a substantially complementary nucleic acid, for example a target sequence or another probe sequence
- substitutent groups to the metallocene rings to facilitate hydrogen bonding to the base or bases on the opposite strand. These may be added to any position on the metallocene rings.
- Suitable substitutent groups include, but are not limited to, amide groups, amine groups, carboxylic acids, and alcohols, including substituted alcohols.
- these substitutent groups can be attached via linkers as well, although in general this is not preferred.
- substituent groups on an ETM may be added to alter the redox properties of the ETM.
- metallocenes such as ferrocene
- substituent groups on an ETM may be added to alter the redox properties of the ETM.
- substituent groups on the metallocene may allow two different ETMs to be distinguished.
- the intermediate components are also provided.
- the invention provides phosphoramidite metallocenes, as generally depicted in Structure 18:
- PG is a protecting group, generally suitable for use in nucleic acid synthesis, with DMT, MMT and TMT all being preferred.
- the aromatic rings can either be the rings of the metallocene, or aromatic rings of ligands for transition metal complexes or other organic ETMs.
- the aromatic rings may be the same or different, and may be substituted as discussed herein.
- Structure 19 depicts the ferrocene derivative:
- Structure 20 depicts the ferrocene peptide nucleic acid (PNA) monomer, that can be added to PNA synthesis as is known in the art:
- the PG protecting group is suitable for use in peptide nucleic acid synthesis, with MMT, boc and Fmoc being preferred.
- ETM or metallocene polymers which are added to the nucleic acids, rather than as backbone replacements, as is more fully described below.
- the ETMs are attached as polymers, for example as metallocene polymers, in a “branched” configuration similar to the “branched DNA” embodiments herein and as outlined in U.S. Pat. No. 5,124,246, using modified functionalized nucleotides.
- the general idea is as follows. A modified phosphoramidite nucleotide is generated that can ultimately contain a free hydroxy group that can be used in the attachment of phosphoramidite ETMs such as metallocenes. This free hydroxy group could be on the base or the backbone, such as the ribose or the phosphate (although as will be appreciated by those in the art, nucleic acid analogs containing other structures can also be used).
- the modified nucleotide is incorporated into a nucleic acid, and any hydroxy protecting groups are removed, thus leaving the free hydroxyl.
- a phosphoramidite ETM such as a metallocene
- ETMs such as metallocene ETMs
- Additional phosphoramidite ETMs such as metallocenes can be added, to form “ETM polymers”, including “metallocene polymers” as depicted herein, particularly for ferrocene.
- it is desirable to increase the solubility of the polymers by adding a “capping” group to the terminal ETM in the polymer, for example a final phosphate group to the metallocene.
- solubility enhancing “capping” groups will be appreciated by those in the art. It should be noted that these solubility enhancing groups can be added to the polymers in other places, including to the ligand rings, for example on the metallocenes as discussed herein
- the 2′ position of a ribose of a phosphoramidite nucleotide is first functionalized to contain a protected hydroxy group, in this case via an oxo-linkage, although any number of linkers can be used, as is generally described herein for Z linkers.
- the protected modified nucleotide is then incorporated via standard phosphoramidite chemistry into a growing nucleic acid.
- the protecting group is removed, and the free hydroxy group is used, again using standard phosphoramidite chemistry to add a phosphoramidite metallocene such as ferrocene.
- a similar reaction is possible for nucleic acid analogs. For example, using peptide nucleic acids and the metallocene monomer shown in Structure 20, peptide nucleic acid structures containing metallocene polymers could be generated.
- the present invention provides recruitment linkers of nucleic acids comprising “branches” of metallocene polymers.
- Embodiments also utilize metallocene polymers from one to about 50 metallocenes in length, with from about 5 to about 20 being preferred and from about 5 to about 10 being especially preferred.
- the recruitment linker is nucleic acid
- any combination of ETM attachments may be done.
- the recruitment linker is not nucleic acid, and instead can be any sort of linker or polymer.
- linker or polymer that can be modified to contain ETMs can be used.
- the polymers or linkers should be reasonably soluble and contain suitable functional groups for the addition of ETMs.
- a “recruitment polymer” comprises at least two or three subunits, which are covalently attached. At least some portion of the monomeric subunits contains functional groups for the covalent attachment of ETMs. In some embodiments coupling moieties are used to covalently link the subunits with the ETMs. Functional groups for attachment can include amino groups, carboxy groups, oxo groups and thiol groups, with amino groups being particularly preferred. As will be appreciated by those in the art, a wide variety of recruitment polymers are possible.
- Suitable linkers include, but are not limited to, alkyl linkers (including heteroalkyl (including (poly)ethylene glycol-type structures), substituted alkyl, aryalkyl linkers, etc.
- the linkers will comprise one or more functional groups for the attachment of ETMs, which will be done as will be appreciated by those in the art, for example through the use homo- or hetero-bifunctional linkers as are well known (see 1994 Pierce Chemical Company catalog, technical section on cross-linkers, pages 155-200, incorporated herein by reference).
- Suitable recruitment polymers include, but are not limited to, functionalized styrenes, such as amino styrene, functionalized dextrans, and polyamino acids.
- Polymers can include polyamino acids (both poly-D-amino acids and poly-L-amino acids), such as polylysine, and polymers containing lysine and other amino acids being particularly preferred.
- Other suitable polyamino acids are polyglutamic acid, polyaspartic acid, co-polymers of lysine and glutamic or aspartic acid, co-polymers of lysine with alanine, tyrosine, phenylalanine, serine, tryptophan, and/or proline.
- the recruitment linker comprises a metallocene polymer, as is described above.
- the attachment of the recruitment linkers to the first portion of the label probe will depend on the composition of the recruitment linker, as will be appreciated by those in the art.
- the recruitment linker is nucleic acid, it is generally formed during the synthesis of the first portion of the label probe, with incorporation of nucleosides containing ETMs as required.
- the first portion of the label probe and the recruitment linker may be made separately, and then attached. For example, there may be an overlapping section of complementarity, forming a section of double stranded nucleic acid that can then be chemically crosslinked, for example by using psoralen as is known in the art.
- attachment of the linker/polymer of the recruitment linker will be done generally using standard chemical techniques, such as will be appreciated by those in the art.
- attachment can be similar to the attachment of insulators to nucleic acids.
- recruitment linkers that are mixtures of nucleic acids and non-nucleic acids, either in a linear form (e.g. nucleic acid segments linked together with alkyl linkers) or in branched forms (nucleic acids with alkyl “branches” that may contain ETMs and may be additionally branched).
- the target sequence itself that carries the ETMs, rather than the recruitment linker of a label probe.
- PCR polymerase chain reaction
- some of the modified nucleotides of the invention for example the “nucleoside replacement” embodiments and putatively some of the phosphate attachments, may or may not be recognized by the enzymes to allow incorporation into a growing nucleic acid. Therefore, attachments in this embodiment are to the base or ribose of the nucleotide.
- PCR amplification of a target sequence will result in target sequences comprising ETMs, generally randomly incorporated into the sequence.
- the system of the invention can then be configured to allow detection using these ETMs, as is generally depicted in FIGS. 16A, 16B and 16D of U.S. Ser. No. 60/190,259.
- methods utilizing these compositions are also provided.
- ETMs may be connected to probe sequences, e.g. sequences designed to hybridize to complementary sequences.
- ETMs may be added to non-recruitment linkers as well.
- ETMs may be added to sections of label probes that do hybridize to components of the assay complex, for example the first portion, or to the target sequence as outlined above.
- These ETMs may be used for electron transfer detection in some embodiments, or they may not, depending on the location and system.
- the target sequence containing randomly incorporated ETMs is hybridized directly to the capture probe, as is depicted in FIG. 16A of U.S. Ser. No. 60/190,259, there may be ETMs in the portion hybridizing to the capture probe.
- the recruitment linker when the recruitment linker is nucleic acid, it may be desirable in some instances to have some or all of the recruitment linker be double stranded.
- the first recruitment linker comprises the covalently attached ETMs.
- the second recruitment linker contains the ETMs, and the first recruitment linker does not, and the ETMs are recruited to the surface by hybridization of the second recruitment linker to the first.
- both the first and second recruitment linkers comprise ETMs.
- nucleic acids comprising a large number of ETMs may not hybridize as well, e.g. the T m may be decreased, depending on the site of attachment and the characteristics of the ETM.
- the T m may be decreased, depending on the site of attachment and the characteristics of the ETM.
- the ETMs when multiple ETMs are used on hybridizing strands, generally there are less than about 5, with less than about 3 being preferred, or alternatively the ETMs should be spaced sufficiently far apart that the intervening nucleotides can sufficiently hybridize to allow good kinetics.
- non-covalently attached ETMs may be used.
- the ETM is a hybridization indicator.
- Hybridization indicators serve as ETMs that will preferentially associate with double stranded nucleic acid, usually reversibly, similar to the method of Millan et al., Anal. Chem. 65:2317-2323 (1993); Millan et al., Anal. Chem. 662943-2948 (1994), both of which are hereby expressly incorporated by reference.
- increases in the local concentration of ETMs, due to the association of the ETM hybridization indicator with double stranded nucleic acid at the surface can be monitored using the monolayers comprising insulators.
- Hybridization indicators include intercalators and minor and/or major groove binding moieties.
- intercalators may be used; since intercalation generally only occurs in the presence of double stranded nucleic acid, only in the presence of double stranded nucleic acid will the ETMs concentrate. Intercalating transition metal complex ETMs are known in the art. Similarly, major or minor groove binding moieties, such as methylene blue, may also be used in this embodiment.
- the systems of the invention may utilize non-covalently attached ETMs, as is generally described in Napier et al., Bioconj. Chem. 8:906 (1997), hereby expressly incorporated by reference.
- ETMs non-covalently attached ETMs
- changes in the redox state of certain molecules as a result of the presence of DNA can be detected using SAMs.
- the present invention provides electrodes comprising monolayers, generally including capture probes, and either target sequences or label probes comprising recruitment linkers containing ETMs.
- Probes of the present invention are designed to be complementary to a target sequence (either the target sequence of the sample or to other probe sequences, as is described below), such that hybridization of the target sequence and the probes of the present invention occurs.
- This complementarity need not be perfect; there may be any number of base pair mismatches which will interfere with hybridization between the target sequence and the single stranded nucleic acids of the present invention. However, if the number of mutations is so great that no hybridization can occur under even the least stringent of hybridization conditions, the sequence is not a complementary target sequence.
- substantially complementary herein is meant that the probes are sufficiently complementary to the target sequences to hybridize under normal reaction conditions.
- Electrode initialization is a step that can be used to promote specific signal, and/or decrease the noise, and/or make the signal more obvious or detectable in a background of noise.
- EI uses an electronic signal to treat a monolayer by preventing non-specific binding of free-floating ETM probes. Without EI, probes that would normally hybridize to a target analyte sometimes diffuse toward the monolayer without hybridizing to the target. This creates non-specific signals and variable signal potentials. In contrast, if EI is utilized by applying, for example, a short voltage scan to a monolayer-containing cartridge post initial wetting, the voltage pulses drives non-specific probes away from the monolayer and prevents significant amounts non-specific signals and current potential variability. The prevention of non-specific signals results in a higher signal to noise ratio observed during the detection steps described herein.
- EI improves E 0 stability.
- E 0 refers to the redox potential, which refers to the voltage which must be applied to an electrode (relative to a standard reference electrode such as a normal hydrogen electrode) such that the ratio of oxidized and reduced ETMs is one in the solution near the electrode.
- An improved E 0 stability results in a lower E 0 that is shifted less from an expected E 0 range relative to samples tested without EI.
- E 0 shifting e.g., can result from variations in the reference electrode, which occurs when the potential at which an ETM label is shifting, thus resulting in a poor fit of a signal trace.
- E 0 shifting can result in no calls and miscalls as described below.
- EI improves score shift.
- score shift refers to a wild-type: mutant signal ratio. Score shifting can occur, for example, when the presence of non-specific labels settle near the surface of an electrodes. Detection of these non-specific labels result in the score being shifted closer to an indeterminate boundary of an assay's calling parameters. Score shifting can result in no calls and miscalls as described below.
- EI reduces low signal miscalls.
- Low signal miscalls can result from a poorly processed sample, which in turn results in a signal that while barely exceeds a signal threshold, the signal is incorrectly fit due to the shape of the signal trace. Score shifting can result in no calls and miscalls as described below.
- the combined major allele and minor allele current (signal) generated for each electrode is usually evaluated against a pre-established signal threshold.
- the genotyping score which is derived from the ratio of different ETM signals for each electrode passing the signal strength threshold parameter, can be evaluated and compared to different boundaries. These boundaries are unique for each polymorphism and can be determined empirically using test performance data.
- the boundaries define zones for classification of scores for a homozygous major allele, a homozygous minor allele and heterozygote genotypes. There can be two ‘indeterminate’ zones; one between the homozygous major allele and heterozygote boundaries, and a second between the heterozygote and homozygous minor allele boundaries.
- an indeterminate score can be considered a no call to prevent miscalls, as only robust scores can be used to assign a genotype.
- EI by combating E 0 shifting and non-specific signal, EI promotes a more robust genotype score by eliminating a signal that can be measured with signal strength, evaluated within genotype score logic, and potentially shift an ETM ratio into an indeterminate score zone or into the incorrect ratio zone, resulting in no calls and miscalls.
- EI can be accomplished, for example, by applying an electronic signal prior to running the detection assays as described herein.
- an electronic initialization signal can be applied via at least a sample electrode (containing the complexes of the invention) and a counter electrode to initiate electron transfer between an electrode and non-specific probes.
- the electronic initialization signal can comprise at least an AC component.
- the AC frequency is varied.
- multiple frequencies of AC voltage are applied.
- several frequencies with a large AC voltage can be applied.
- the AC frequency can range from 90-1000 Hz.
- the AC voltage can range from ⁇ 150 to 880 mV rms. EI can be completed in 0.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, or longer than 10 seconds.
- combinations of AC and DC signals such as AC/CD offset described below, can be used for EI.
- the invention can provide voltage sources capable of delivering both AC and DC currents.
- a plurality of electronic initialization signals is applied. As outlined herein, this may take a variety of forms, including using multiple frequencies, multiple DC offset voltages at a single or two or more frequencies, or multiple AC amplitudes, or combinations of any or all of these.
- the invention provides assay complexes that minimally comprise a target analyte and a capture binding ligand.
- assay complex herein is meant the collection of hybridization complexes comprising nucleic acids, including probes and targets that contains at least one label (preferably an ETM in the electronic methods of the present invention) and thus allows detection.
- the composition of the assay complex depends on the use of the different probe components outlined herein.
- the assay complexes may also include label probes, capture extender probes, label extender probes, and amplifier probes, as outlined herein and in U.S. Ser. No. 09/626,096, depending on the configuration used.
- the assays are generally run under stringency conditions which allow formation of the label probe hybridization complex only in the presence of target.
- Stringency can be controlled by altering a step parameter that is a thermodynamic variable, including, but not limited to, temperature, formamide concentration, salt concentration, chaotropic salt concentration pH, organic solvent concentration, etc.
- reaction may be accomplished in a variety of ways, as will be appreciated by those in the art. Components of the reaction may be added simultaneously, or sequentially, in any order, with embodiments outlined below.
- the reaction may include a variety of other reagents. These include reagents like salts, buffers, neutral proteins (e.g. albumin), detergents, etc which may be used to facilitate optimal hybridization and detection, and/or reduce non-specific or background interactions. Also reagents that otherwise improve the efficiency of the assay, such as protease inhibitors, nuclease inhibitors, anti-microbial agents, etc., may be used, depending on the sample preparation methods and purity of the target.
- Detection of electron transfer is generally initiated electronically, with voltage being preferred.
- a potential is applied to the assay complex. Precise control and variations in the applied potential can be via a potentiostat and either a three electrode system (one reference, one sample (or working) and one counter electrode) or a two electrode system (one sample and one counter electrode). This allows matching of applied potential to peak potential of the system which depends in part on the choice of ETMs and in part on the other system components, the composition and integrity of the monolayer, and what type of reference electrode is used.
- ferrocene is an ETM.
- co-reductants or co-oxidants are used as is generally described in WO00/16089, hereby expressly incorporated by reference.
- the presence of the ETMs at the surface of the monolayer can be detected in a variety of ways.
- a variety of detection methods may be used, including, but not limited to, optical detection (as a result of spectral changes upon changes in redox states), which includes fluorescence, phosphorescence, luminiscence, chemiluminescence, electrochemiluminescence, and refractive index; and electronic detection, including, but not limited to, amperommetry, voltammetry, capacitance and impedence.
- optical detection as a result of spectral changes upon changes in redox states
- electronic detection including, but not limited to, amperommetry, voltammetry, capacitance and impedence.
- These methods include time or frequency dependent methods based on AC or DC currents, pulsed methods, lock-in techniques, filtering (high pass, low pass, band pass), and time-resolved techniques including time-resolved fluoroscence.
- the efficient transfer of electrons from the ETM to the electrode results in stereotyped changes in the redox state of the ETM.
- ETMs including the complexes of ruthenium containing bipyridine, pyridine, and imidazole rings
- these changes in redox state are associated with changes in spectral properties.
- Significant differences in absorbance are observed between reduced and oxidized states for these molecules. See for example Fabbrizzi et al., Chem. Soc. Rev. 1995 pp197-202). Such differences can be monitored using a spectrophotometer or simple photomultiplier tube device.
- possible electron donors and acceptors include all the derivatives listed above for photoactivation or initiation. Electron donors and acceptors have characteristically large spectral changes upon oxidation and reduction resulting in highly sensitive monitoring of electron transfer. Such examples include Ru(NH 3 ) 4 py and Ru(bpy) 2 im as preferred examples. It should be understood that only the donor or acceptor that is being monitored by absorbance need have ideal spectral characteristics.
- the electron transfer is detected fluorometrically.
- Numerous transition metal complexes, including those of ruthenium, have distinct fluorescence properties. Therefore, the change in redox state of the electron donors and electron acceptors attached to the nucleic acid can be monitored very sensitively using fluorescence, for example with Ru(4,7-biphenyl 2 -phenanthroline) 3 2+ . The production of this compound can be easily measured using standard fluorescence assay techniques.
- laser induced fluorescence can be recorded in a standard single cell fluorimeter, a flow through “on-line” fluorimeter (such as those attached to a chromatography system) or a multi-sample “plate-reader” similar to those marketed for 96-well immuno assays.
- fluorescence can be measured using fiber optic sensors with nucleic acid probes in solution or attached to the fiber optic. Fluorescence is monitored using a photomultiplier tube or other light detection instrument attached to the fiber optic. The advantage of this system is the extremely small volumes of sample that can be assayed.
- scanning fluorescence detectors such as the Fluorlmager sold by Molecular Dynamics are ideally suited to monitoring the fluorescence of modified nucleic acid molecules arrayed on solid surfaces.
- the advantage of this system is the large number of electron transfer probes that can be scanned at once using chips covered with thousands of distinct nucleic acid probes.
- transition metal complexes display fluorescence with large Stokes shifts. Suitable examples include bis- and trisphenanthroline complexes and bis- and trisbipyridyl complexes of transition metals such as ruthenium (see Juris, A., Balzani, V., et. al. Coord. Chem. Rev ., V. 84, p. 85-277, 1988). Examples display efficient fluorescence (reasonably high quantum yields) as well as low reorganization energies.
- electrochemiluminescence is used as the basis of the electron transfer detection.
- ETMs such as Ru 2+ (bpy) 3
- direct luminescence accompanies excited state decay. Changes in this property are associated with nucleic acid hybridization and can be monitored with a simple photomultiplier tube arrangement (see Blackburn, G. F. Clin. Chem. 37: 1534-1539 (1991); and Juris et al., supra.
- electronic detection is used, including amperommetry, voltammetry, capacitance, and impedence.
- Suitable techniques include, but are not limited to, electrogravimetry; coulometry (including controlled potential coulometry and constant current coulometry); voltammetry (cyclic voltammetry, pulse voltammetry (normal pulse voltammetry, square wave voltammetry, differential pulse voltammetry, Osteryoung square wave voltammetry, and coulostatic pulse techniques); stripping analysis (aniodic stripping analysis, cathiodic stripping analysis, square wave stripping voltammetry); conductance measurements (electrolytic conductance, direct analysis); time-dependent electrochemical analyses (chronoamperometry, chronopotentiometry, cyclic chronopotentiometry and amperometry, AC polography, chronogalvametry, and chronocoulometry); AC impedance measurement; capacitance measurement; AC voltammetry; and photoelectrochemistry.
- monitoring electron transfer is via amperometric detection.
- This method of detection involves applying a potential (as compared to a separate reference electrode) between the nucleic acid-conjugated electrode and a reference (counter) electrode in the sample containing target genes of interest. Electron transfer of differing efficiencies is induced in samples in the presence or absence of target nucleic acid; that is, the presence or absence of the target nucleic acid, and thus the label probe, can result in different currents.
- the device for measuring electron transfer amperometrically involves sensitive current detection and includes a means of controlling the voltage potential, usually a potentiostat. This voltage is optimized with reference to the potential of the electron donating complex on the label probe.
- Possible electron donating complexes include those previously mentioned with complexes of iron, osmium, platinum, cobalt, rhenium and ruthenium being preferred and complexes of iron being most preferred.
- potentiometric (or voltammetric) measurements involve non-faradaic (no net current flow) processes and are utilized traditionally in pH and other ion detectors. Similar sensors are used to monitor electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode.
- other properties of insulators and of conductors such as resistance conductivity, impedance and capicitance could be used to monitor electron transfer between ETM and the electrode.
- any system that generates a current such as electron transfer
- also generates a small magnetic field which may be monitored in some embodiments.
- one benefit of the fast rates of electron transfer observed in the compositions of the invention is that time resolution can greatly enhance the signal-to-noise results of monitors based on absorbance, fluorescence and electronic current.
- the fast rates of electron transfer of the present invention result both in high signals and stereotyped delays between electron transfer initiation and completion. By amplifying signals of particular delays, such as through the use of pulsed initiation of electron transfer and “lock-in” amplifiers of detection, and Fourier transforms.
- electron transfer is initiated using alternating current (AC) methods.
- AC alternating current
- any technique that can serve to better identify a signal in the background noise may find use in the present invention.
- These techniques are generally classified in three ways: (1) variations in the type or methods of applying the initiation signals (e.g. varying the “input” to maximize or identify the sample signal); (2) data processing, e.g. techniques used on the “output” signals to maximize or identify the sample signal; and (3) variations in the assay itself, e.g. to the electrode surface or to the components of the system, that allow for better identification of the sample signal.
- suitable “input” AC methods include, but are not limited to, using multiple frequencies; increasing the AC amplitude; the use of square wave ACV; the use of special or complicated waveforms; etc.
- suitable “output” AC techniques include, but are not limited to, monitoring higher harmonic frequencies; phase analysis or filters; background subtraction techniques (including but not limited to impedance analysis and the use of signal recognition or peak recognition techniques); digital filtering techniques; bandwidth narrowing techniques (including lock-in detection schemes particularly digital lock in); Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) methods; correlation and/or convolution techniques; signal averaging; spectral analysis; etc.
- FFT Fast Fourier Transform
- varying components of the assay can be done to result in the sample signal and the noise signal being altered in a non-parallel fashion; that is, the two signals respond non-linearly with respect to each other.
- non-specifically bound label probes/ETMs show differences in impedance (e.g. higher impedances) than when the label probes containing the ETMs are specifically bound in the correct orientation.
- the non-specifically bound material is washed away, resulting in an effective impedance of infinity.
- AC detection gives several advantages as is generally discussed below, including an increase in sensitivity, and the ability to “filter out” background noise.
- changes in impedance including, for example, bulk impedance
- changes in impedance as between non-specific binding of ETM-containing probes and target-specific assay complex formation may be monitored.
- frequency response when using AC initiation and detection methods, the frequency response of the system changes as a result of the presence of the ETM.
- frequency response herein is meant a modification of signals as a result of electron transfer between the electrode and the ETM. This modification is different depending on signal frequency.
- a frequency response includes AC currents at one or more frequencies, phase shifts, DC offset voltages, faradaic impedance, etc.
- the first input electrical signal is then applied to the system, preferably via at least the sample electrode (containing the complexes of the invention) and the counter electrode, to initiate electron transfer between the electrode and the ETM.
- the first input signal comprises at least an AC component.
- the AC component may be of variable amplitude and frequency. Generally, for use in the present methods, the AC amplitude ranges from about 1 mV to about 1.1 V, with from about 10 mV to about 800 mV being preferred, and from about 10 mV to about 500 mV being especially preferred.
- the AC frequency ranges from about 0.01 Hz to about 100 MHz, with from about 10 Hz to about 10 MHz being preferred, and from about 100 Hz to about 20 MHz being especially preferred.
- the first input signal comprises a DC component and an AC component, which is known at AC/DC offset. That is, a DC offset voltage between the working and counter electrodes is swept through the electrochemical potential of the ETM (for example, when ferrocene is used, the sweep is generally from 0 to 500 mV) (or alternatively, the working Electrode is grounded and the counter electrode is swept from 0 to ⁇ 500 mV). The sweep is used to identify the DC voltage at which the maximum response of the system is seen. This is generally at or about the electrochemical potential of the ETM. Once this voltage is determined, either a sweep or one or more uniform DC offset voltages may be used.
- DC offset voltages of from about ⁇ 1 V to about +1.1 V are preferred, with from about ⁇ 500 mV to about +800 mV being especially preferred, and from about ⁇ 300 mV to about 500 mV being particularly preferred. In an embodiment, the DC offset voltage is not zero.
- an AC signal component of variable amplitude and frequency is applied. If the ETM is present, and can respond to the AC perturbation, an AC current will be produced due to electron transfer between the electrode and the ETM.
- the devices of the invention preferably provide voltage sources capable of delivering both AC and DC currents.
- a single input signal may be applied to differentiate between the presence and absence of the ETM (e.g. the presence of the target sequence) nucleic acid.
- a plurality of input signals is applied. As outlined herein, this may take a variety of forms, including using multiple frequencies, multiple DC offset voltages, or multiple AC amplitudes, or combinations of any or all of these.
- DC offset voltages are used, although as outlined above, DC voltage sweeps are preferred. This may be done at a single frequency, or at two or more frequencies.
- the AC frequency is varied. At different frequencies, different molecules respond in different ways. As will be appreciated by those in the art, increasing the frequency generally increases the output current. However, when the frequency is greater than the rate at which electrons may travel between the electrode and the ETM, higher frequencies result in a loss or decrease of output signal. At some point, the frequency will be greater than the rate of electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode, and then the output signal will also drop.
- multiple frequencies with a small AC voltage are applied and the fundamental of each is evaluated.
- an embodiment utilizes several frequencies with a large AC voltage, and the harmonics of each are evaluated.
- embodiments utilize several frequencies with a large AC voltage where the effect of the different frequencies on the system can result in an output that is different from the sum of the outputs at individual frequencies.
- detection utilizes a single measurement of output signal at a single frequency. That is, the frequency response of the system in the absence of target sequence, and thus the absence of label probe containing ETMs, can be previously determined to be very low at a particular high frequency. Using this information, any response at a particular frequency, will show the presence of the assay complex. That is, any response at a particular frequency is characteristic of the assay complex. Thus, it may only be necessary to use a single input frequency, and any changes in frequency response is an indication that the ETM is present, and thus that the target sequence is present.
- the input signals and data processing steps are done to increase the non-linearity of the system. That is, for example, the ferrocene response reacts non-linearly, producing a harmonic response in the signal above that in the background; this harmonic signal from AC voltammetry is most likely the result of a harmonic distortion due to the nonlinear response of the electrochemical cell; see Yap, J. of Electroanalytical Chem. 454 : 33 ( 1998 ); hereby incorporated by reference. Thus, any techniques that increase this non-linearity are desirable. In an embodiment, techniques are used to increase the higher harmonic signals; thus, frequency and phase-sensitive lock-in detection is performed at both the fundamental frequency of the applied waveform and also at multiples of the fundamental frequency (e.g.
- the higher harmonics or just one. Since the background capacitance responds relatively linearly to AC signals (a sine wave input AC voltage results in a relatively nondistorted sine wave output), very little upper harmonic current is produced in the background. This gives a dramatic increase in the signal to noise ratio. Thus, detection at the higher harmonic frequencies, particularly the third, fourth and fifth harmonics (although the harmonics from second to tenth or greater can also be used) is shown to result in dramatic suppression of the background currents associated with non-Faradaic processes (like double layer charging) that can overwhelm the signal from the target molecules. In this way, the evaluation of the system at higher harmonic frequencies and phases can lead to significant improvements in the detection limits and clarity of signal. However, in some embodiments, the analysis of higher harmonics is not desired.
- one method of increasing the non-linear harmonic response is to increase or vary the amplitude of the AC perturbation, although this may also be used in monitoring the fundamental frequency as well.
- increasing the amplitude increases the driving force nonlinearly.
- the same system gives an improved response (e.g. higher output signals) at any single frequency through the use of higher overpotentials at that frequency.
- the amplitude may be increased at high frequencies to increase the rate of electron transfer through the system, resulting in greater sensitivity.
- this may be used, for example, to induce responses in slower systems such as those that do not possess optimal spacing configurations.
- measurements of the system are taken at least two separate amplitudes or overpotentials, with measurements at a plurality of amplitudes being preferred.
- changes in response as a result of changes in amplitude may form the basis of identification, calibration and quantification of the system.
- one or more AC frequencies can be used as well.
- harmonic square wave AC voltage is used; see Baranski et al., J. Electroanal. Chem. 373:157 (1994), incorporated herein by reference, although in some embodiments this is not preferred.
- square waves are easier to create digitally and the pulse shape of the square wave can allow for better discrimination against charging capacitance.
- sinusoidal harmonic AC voltammetry harmonic signals provide better signal to background since faradaic response can be more nonlinear than charging capacitance.
- SW harmonic AC voltage The key difference between the two techniques is the frequency spectrum of the AC waveform.
- a singular frequency sinusoidal waveform contains just the fundamental frequency whereas a singular square wave contains the fundamental frequency as well as all odd harmonics.
- the technique looks at the even harmonics where the ratio of faradaic current to capacitance current is enhanced. All the odd harmonics have single AC voltage peaks while all the even harmonics have double AC voltage peaks. This is opposite to the case of sinusoidal harmonic AC voltage of a system that has a non-reversible redox couple.
- multiple frequency AC voltage is used.
- the idea is to create a waveform consisting of multiple frequencies with the same amplitude or different amplitudes to excite an electrochemical cell in an AC voltage fashion.
- the method benefits from fast Fourier transform or joint time-frequency transform to analyze the cell response.
- a JTFT spectrogram of a multiple frequencies AC voltage provides information on the driven (or fundamental) frequencies as well as their harmonic components.
- a fast Fourier transform is done, as is generally outlined in the examples.
- Fourier transform analysis is a method for improving signal to noise and isolating desired signals when sinusoidal electrochemistry is done.
- Typical AC techniques rely on measurements of the primary frequency only.
- sinusoidal voltammetry (and other inputs) observation at higher harmonics allows discrimination of signals primarily based on kinetics. For example, both fast and slow redox events would give similar peaks (provided the AC frequency was not too high) at the primary frequency. However, at higher harmonics, some redox molecules would generate signals while others would not.
- FFT analysis all the various frequency components of a response to a sinusoidal input can be observed at once.
- JTFT joint time-frequency transform
- digital lock-in techniques are used.
- digitized raw data from the electrochemical cell have been analyzed by either fast Fourier transform or some complex form of joint time-frequency transform analysis.
- the major drawback of these methods is the enormous computational time associated with frequency transformation techniques.
- Digital lock-in is simple and fast.
- digital lock-in is identical to analog lock-in.
- the bandwidth narrowing process is done mathematically by multiplying the cell response by a sinusoidal with the same frequency as the input voltage, but with 90 — phase shift.
- the technique has the same limitation as its analog counterpart since only one frequency can be analyzed at a time.
- other frequencies can also be analyzed sequentially (or in parallel with a more powerful processor) since the raw data is archived.
- V in E dc +rt+E ac Sin( ⁇ t ) (1)
- the cell's response is essentially
- background subtraction of the current vector and phase optimization is done.
- correlation and/or convolution techniques are used.
- signal recovery is done using signal recognition and background subtraction.
- the idea is to fit the cell response to two summed functions, one that describes the signal and the other that models the background capacitive current. Once the functions are constructed, the signal is easily recovered from the response by subtracting the fitted background capacitive current.
- This signal recognition scheme is applicable to any system where the signal has a behavior and shape that is relatively well known.
- the response from an electrochemical cell can be processed with a lock-in amplifier or equivalent bandwidth-narrowing technique. This is one of many methods of increasing signal to background using some form of bandwidth-narrowing technique.
- spectral analysis of the signal is done.
- filtering techniques in the frequency domain make use of means, variances, densities, autocorrelation functions, and power spectral densities of the signal and apply it to the present systems to enhance the signal to noise ratio (see Schwartz et al., Signal Processing: Discrete Spectral Analysis, Detection, and Estimation, N.Y. McGraw Hill, 1975, hereby incorporated by reference).
- digital filtering techniques are used. These include, but are not limited to, match filter, Weiner filtering, Kalman, Finite Impulse Response, infinite impulse response, narrow band filtering, etc.
- a match filter is used; see Ziemer et al., “Principles of Communication Systems, Modulation and Noise”, 4th Ed. John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 465-471, 1988; and Helstrom, C. W., “Statistical Theory of Signal Detection”, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 112-115, 1968, both of which are incorporated by reference.
- a match filter is a signal processing technique that “weights” the measured response (signal plus noise) samples by some corresponding known signal amplitude and convolutes the two signals to enhance signal to noise.
- a Weiner filter is used (see Press, supra; and Elliot et al., Fast Transforms: Algorithm, Analysis, Applications N.Y. Academic Press (1982), both of which are incorporated by reference).
- Weiner filtering involves finding an optimal filter that removes noise or background from the “corrupted” signal. This signal processing method works in conjunction with Fourier transform techniques. The idea is as follows. Due to poor signal to noise or a large background, the output from the instrument is a “corrupted” signal
- s(t) is the signal and n(t) is the noise.
- s(t) is not the desired signal, it is composed of the true uncorrupted signal u(t) convolved with some known response function r(t) (In the case of the CMS system with a redox couple, u(t) is the Nernstian). In other words,
- S, R, and U are the Fourier transform of s, r, and u, respectively.
- the uncorrupted signal can be recovered by finding the optimal filter ⁇ (t) or its Fourier counterpart ⁇ ( ⁇ ) which when applied to the measured signal c(t) or C( ⁇ ), and then deconvolved by r(t) or R( ⁇ ), produces a signal that approximates the uncorrupted signal u(t) or U( ⁇ ) with
- the optimal filter is defined as
- ⁇ ⁇ ( ⁇ ) ⁇ S ⁇ ( ⁇ ) ⁇ 2 ⁇ S ⁇ ( ⁇ ) ⁇ 2 + ⁇ N ⁇ ( ⁇ ) ⁇ 2 .
- a Kalman filter is used, which is a recursive-estimation filtering technique that tracks the current value of a changing signal in the presence of noise. See Kalman et al., A New Approach to Linear Filtering and Prediction Problems, Trans. ASME J. Basic Engineering, Series D, 82, Mar. 35, 1960; Elliot Ed. Handbook of Digital Signal Processing: Engineering Applications, “Academic Press, San Diego, p908, 1987; Chui et al., Kalman Filtering: with Real Time Applications”, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1987; all of which are expressly incorporated by reference.
- the non-linear harmonic response is increased by inducing an asymmetrical response. In an embodiment, this is done by using a system that has a non-reversible redox couple.
- ferrocene is a redox couple that is very reversible.
- the ferrocenes subtended by the ac voltage at a given point get oxidized on the upswing of the ac voltage and reduced on the down swing.
- a semi-reversible or non-reversible redox couple is used, for example, the molecule will get oxidized on the upswing and not reduced (or a portion) on the downswing; or vice versa. This will produce even greater non-linearities at certain frequencies.
- electron transfer is initiated using alternating current (AC) methods.
- AC alternating current
- the use of AC techniques allows the significant reduction of background signals at any single frequency due to entities other than the ETMs, e.g. “locking out” or “filtering” unwanted signals. That is, the frequency response of a charge carrier or redox active molecule in solution will be limited by its diffusion coefficient and charge transfer coefficient. Accordingly, at high frequencies, a charge carrier may not diffuse rapidly enough to transfer its charge to the electrode, and/or the charge transfer kinetics may not be fast enough. This is particularly significant in embodiments that do not have good monolayers, e.g. have partial or insufficient monolayers, e.g. where the solvent is accessible to the electrode.
- the presence of “holes” where the electrode is accessible to the solvent can result in solvent charge carriers “short circuiting” the system, e.g. they reach the electrode and generate background signal.
- one or more frequencies can be chosen that prevent a frequency response of one or more charge carriers in solution, whether or not a monolayer is present. This is particularly significant since many biological fluids such as blood contain significant amounts of redox active molecules which can interfere with amperometric detection methods.
- measurements of the system are taken at least two separate frequencies, with measurements at a plurality of frequencies being preferred.
- a plurality of frequencies includes a scan. For example, measuring the output signal, e.g., the AC current, at a low input frequency such as 1-20 Hz, and comparing the response to the output signal at high frequency such as 10-100 kHz will show a frequency response difference between the presence and absence of the ETM.
- the frequency response is determined at at least two, preferably at least about five, and more preferably at least about ten frequencies.
- an output signal is received or detected.
- the presence and magnitude of the output signal will depend on a number of factors, including the overpotential/amplitude of the input signal; the frequency of the input AC signal; the composition of the intervening medium; the DC offset; the environment of the system; the nature of the ETM; the solvent; and the type and concentration of salt.
- the presence and magnitude of the output signal will depend in general on the presence or absence of the ETM, the placement and distance of the ETM from the surface of the monolayer and the character of the input signal. In some embodiments, it may be possible to distinguish between non-specific binding of label probes and the formation of target specific assay complexes containing label probes, on the basis of impedance.
- the output signal comprises an AC current.
- the magnitude of the output current will depend on a number of parameters. By varying these parameters, the system may be optimized in a number of ways.
- AC currents generated in the present invention range from about 1 femptoamp to about 1 milliamp, with currents from about 50 femptoamps to about 100 microamps being preferred, and from about 1 picoamp to about 1 microamp being especially preferred.
- the output signal is phase shifted in the AC component relative to the input signal.
- the systems of the present invention may be sufficiently uniform to allow phase-shifting based detection. That is, the complex biomolecules of the invention through which electron transfer occurs react to the AC input in a homogeneous manner, similar to standard electronic components, such that a phase shift can be determined. This may serve as the basis of detection between the presence and absence of the ETM, and/or differences between the presence of target-specific assay complexes comprising label probes and non-specific binding of the label probes to the system components.
- the output signal is characteristic of the presence of the ETM; that is, the output signal is characteristic of the presence of the target-specific assay complex comprising label probes and ETMs.
- the basis of the detection is a difference in the faradaic impedance of the system as a result of the formation of the assay complex.
- Faradaic impedance is the impedance of the system between the electrode and the ETM. Faradaic impedance is quite different from the bulk or dielectric impedance, which is the impedance of the bulk solution between the electrodes. Many factors may change the faradaic impedance which may not affect the bulk impedance, and vice versa.
- the assay complexes comprising the nucleic acids in this system have certain faradaic impedance that will depend on the distance between the ETM and the electrode, their electronic properties, and the composition of the intervening medium, among other things.
- the faradaic impedance between the ETM and the electrode is significantly different depending on whether the label probes containing the ETMs are specifically or non-specifically bound to the electrode.
- the present invention further provides electronic devices or apparatus for the detection of analytes using the compositions of the invention.
- the apparatus includes a test chamber for receiving a sample solution which has at least a first measuring or sample electrode, and a second measuring or counter electrode. Three electrode systems are also useful.
- the first and second measuring electrodes are in contact with a test sample receiving region, such that in the presence of a liquid test sample, the two electrophoresis electrodes may be in electrical contact.
- the apparatus also includes detection electrodes comprising a single stranded nucleic acid capture probe covalently attached via an attachment linker, and a monolayer, such as are described herein.
- the apparatus further comprises an AC voltage source electrically connected to the test chamber; that is, to the measuring electrodes.
- the AC voltage source is capable of delivering DC offset voltage as well.
- the apparatus further comprises a processor capable of comparing the input signal and the output signal.
- the processor is coupled to the electrodes and configured to receive an output signal, and thus detect the presence of the target nucleic acid.
- EI electrode initialization
- An eSensor®CF Genotyping Test was used for determining the genotyping status of a defined panel of CF mutations.
- Purified genomic DNA was isolated from the patient specimen.
- the eSensor® Cystic Fibrosis Genotyping Test generated single stranded target DNA from the genomic DNA by multiplex PCR amplification followed by exonuclease digestion.
- the specimen was combined with a signal buffer containing a pair of allele-specific oligonucleotide signal probes for each polymorphism, where each pair of signal probes was labeled with a genotype-specific ferrocene derivative.
- the mixture of amplified sample and signal buffer was loaded onto a cartridge containing single stranded oligonucleotide capture probes bound to gold-plated electrodes.
- the cartridge was inserted into an XT-8 instrument where the single stranded targets hybridized to the complementary sequences of the capture probes and signal probes.
- the ferrocene label was detected at the electrode surface using voltammetry.
- the resulting current was interpreted by the XT-8 system and reporting software to evaluate signal strength and genotyping score.
- the combined major allele and minor allele current (signal) generated for each electrode was evaluated against a pre-established signal threshold.
- Table 1 Twenty (20) Coriell and five (5) MMQCI control samples (Table 1) were tested that represent wild-type (RM005172: Control E_CF.WT) and all heterozygous and/or mutant genotypes included in a GenMark CF panel. In addition, three (3) wild-type and three (3) representative heterozygous patient genomic DNA samples (delF508, G542X, and R117H) were tested. One sample previously demonstrated to result in a high level of 1717-1G>A (see Table 3) low signal calls will be tested in quadruplicate. Table 1 summarizes each of the samples used in addition to the mutation(s) that each sample represents.
- EI sought to address 2184delA discordant calls in a CF assay.
- the CF assay was affected by three unique failure modes, which in some cases can generate miscalls.
- the three failure modes are 1) EO shifting, 2) Score shifting, and 3) Low signal miscalls.
- Samples were prepared as follows: MMQCI control samples were obtained from inventory and are ready for use in amplification. The majority of the Coriell control samples were diluted 1:10 in molecular grade water from the stock solutions (final concentration of ⁇ 25 ng/ul). Two Coriell samples were run at 2 ng/ul and two were run at 100 ng/ul to cover the recommended range of DNA input into the assay.
- E 0 stability Initialization reduced E 0 by 0.005V in N330 and by 0.006V in QW56 ( FIG. 5 ). The differences were both significant, p ⁇ 0.00001 by 2 sample t-test.
- Coriell Control Known CF Initialization Sample Het Mutation Old Protocol Protocol 1 1717 ⁇ 1G > A; 7T/7T 3894 + 10KbC > T indet ⁇ 2 1898 + 1G > A; delF508; 7T/9T ⁇ ⁇ 3 2184delA; delF508; 7T/9T 3894 + 10KbC > T indet ⁇ 4 2789 + 5G > A; 7T/7T 1898 + 1G > A indet OR 3659 DelC indet, 3849 + 10KbC > T indet ⁇ 5 3120 + 1G > A; 621 + 1G > T; 7T/9T 3659delC indet ⁇ 6 3659delC; delF508; 7T/9T 3120 + 1G > A HET, 3849 + 10KbC > T HET ⁇ 7 3849 + 10KbC > T; delF508; 3659delC
- Electrode Initialization was tested at different initialization time periods using the markers FLUA, MS2, RSVB, FluA H1, and ADVC at 0.5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 5 seconds.
- FIGS. 10 and 12 show that an initialization scan results in increased signal using the initialization time periods indicated.
- FIGS. 11 and 13 show that an initialization scan results in decreased noise using each of the initialization time periods indicated.
- EI was further tested at different initialization time periods was tested. Initialization scans were test at 0, 2, 5, and 10 seconds using MS2 signals as a control.
- FIG. 14 shows that background signals decreased using EI.
- FIG. 15 shows that MS2 positive signals decreased slightly with EI.
- FIG. 16 demonstrates that the overall signal to noise ratio increased significantly following an initialization scan.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Hematology (AREA)
- Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Biotechnology (AREA)
- Microbiology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Pathology (AREA)
- Cell Biology (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Food Science & Technology (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Apparatus Associated With Microorganisms And Enzymes (AREA)
- Measuring Or Testing Involving Enzymes Or Micro-Organisms (AREA)
- Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
- Wood Science & Technology (AREA)
- Zoology (AREA)
- Biophysics (AREA)
- Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- This is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/218,615, filed on Mar. 18, 2014, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/798,260, filed Mar. 15, 2013. The prior applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
- There are a number of assays and sensors for the detection of the presence and/or concentration of specific substances in fluids and gases. Many of these rely on specific ligand/antiligand reactions as the mechanism of detection. That is, pairs of substances (e.g. the binding pairs or ligand/antiligands) are known to bind to each other, while binding little or not at all to other substances. This has been the focus of a number of techniques that utilize these binding pairs for the detection of the complexes. These generally are done by labeling one component of the complex in some way, so as to make the entire complex detectable, using, for example, radioisotopes, fluorescent and other optically active molecules, enzymes, etc.
- The detection of specific nucleic acids is an important tool for diagnostic medicine and molecular biology research. Gene probe assays currently play roles in identifying infectious organisms such as bacteria and viruses, in probing the expression of normal genes and identifying mutant genes such as oncogenes, in typing tissue for compatibility preceding tissue transplantation, in matching tissue or blood samples for forensic medicine, and for exploring homology among genes from different species.
- Ideally, a gene probe assay should be sensitive, specific and easily automatable (for a review, see Nickerson, Current Opinion in Biotechnology 4:48-51 (1993)). The requirement for sensitivity (e.g. low detection limits) has been greatly alleviated by the development of the polymerase chain reaction (PCR) and other amplification technologies which allow researchers to amplify exponentially a specific nucleic acid sequence before analysis as outlined below (for a review, see Abramson et al., Current Opinion in Biotechnology, 4:41-47 (1993)).
- Sensitivity, e.g. detection limits, remain a significant obstacle in nucleic acid detection systems, and a variety of techniques have been developed to address this issue. Briefly, these techniques can be classified as either target amplification or signal amplification. Target amplification involves the amplification (e.g. replication) of the target sequence to be detected, resulting in a significant increase in the number of target molecules. Target amplification strategies include the polymerase chain reaction (PCR), strand displacement amplification (SDA), and nucleic acid sequence based amplification (NASBA).
- Alternatively, rather than amplify the target, alternate techniques use the target as a template to replicate a signaling probe, allowing a small number of target molecules to result in a large number of signaling probes, that then can be detected. Signal amplification strategies include the ligase chain reaction (LCR), cycling probe technology (CPT), and the use of “amplification probes” such as “branched DNA” that result in multiple label probes binding to a single target sequence.
- The polymerase chain reaction (PCR) is widely used and described, and involves the use of primer extension combined with thermal cycling to amplify a target sequence; see U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,683,195 and 4,683,202, and PCR Essential Data, J. W. Wiley & sons, Ed. C. R. Newton, 1995, all of which are incorporated by reference.
- Strand displacement amplification (SDA) is generally described in Walker et al., in Molecular Methods for Virus Detection, Academic Press, Inc., 1995, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,455,166 and 5,130,238, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
- Nucleic acid sequence based amplification (NASBA) is generally described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,409,818 and “Profiting from Gene-based Diagnostics,” CTB International Publishing Inc., N.J., 1996, both of which are incorporated by reference.
- The ligation chain reaction (LCR) involves the ligation of two smaller probes into a single long probe, using the target sequence as the template for the ligase. See generally U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,185,243 and 5,573,907;
EP 0 320 308 B1;EP 0 336 731 B1;EP 0 439 182 B1; WO 90/01069; WO 89/12696; and WO 89/09835, all of which are incorporated by reference. - “Branched DNA” signal amplification relies on the synthesis of branched nucleic acids, containing a multiplicity of nucleic acid “arms” that function to increase the amount of label that can be put onto one probe. This technology is generally described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,681,702, 5,597,909, 5,545,730, 5,594,117, 5,591,584, 5,571,670, 5,580,731, 5,571,670, 5,591,584, 5,624,802, 5,635,352, 5,594,118, 5,359,100, 5,124,246 and 5,681,697, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference.
- Similarly, dendrimers of nucleic acids serve to vastly increase the amount of label that can be added to a single molecule, using a similar idea but different compositions. This technology is as described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,175,270 and Nilsen et al., J. Theor. Biol. 187:273 (1997), both of which are incorporated herein by reference.
- Other assays rely on electronic signals for detection. Of particular interest are biosensors. At least two types of biosensors are known; enzyme-based or metabolic biosensors and binding or bioaffinity sensors. See for example U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,713,347; 5,192,507; 4,920,047; 3,873,267; and references disclosed therein, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference. While some of these known sensors use alternating current (AC) techniques, these techniques are generally limited to the detection of differences in bulk (or dielectric) impedance.
- There are a variety of nucleic acid biosensors currently known. These include nucleic acid biochips based on fluorescent detection; see for example materials developed by Affymetrix (including, but not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,800,992, 5,445,934, 5,744,305, and related patents and materials), Nanogen (including, but not limited to, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,532,129, 5,605,662, 5,565,322 and 5,632,957 and related patents and materials), Southern (EP 0 373 023 B1) and Synteni/Incyte (WO 95/35505 and related patents and materials). Similarly, electronic detection of nucleic acids using electrodes is also known; see for example U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,591,578; 5,824,473; 5,705,348; 5,780,234, 5,770,369, 6,063,573, 6,686,150 and 7,090,804; U.S. Ser. Nos. 08/873,598 08/911,589; and WO 98/20162; PCT/US98/12430; PCT/US98/12082; PCT/US99/10104; PCT/US99/01705, and PCT/US99/01703 and related materials, of which hereby are incorporated by reference.
- However, further methods are still needed to exploit signal processing advantages in detecting biomolecules such as target analytes. Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide devices and methods for improved signal to noise detection of biomolecules.
- In various embodiments, the invention provides a method for detecting the presence of a target analyte in a sample. In an embodiment, the method comprises a) providing an electrode comprising a monolayer and a capture binding ligand; b) initializing the electrode; c) hybridizing a probe to said target analyte to form an assay complex; and d) detecting the presence or absence of said target analyte.
- In an embodiment, the detecting provides a better signal to noise ratio than a method wherein no initializing step b) is performed.
- In an embodiment, said target analyte is selected from the group consisting of a nucleic acid, a protein, and a combination thereof. In an embodiment, the monolayer is a self-assembled monolayer (SAM). In an embodiment, the SAM comprises insulators. In an embodiment, the SAM comprises conductive oligomers.
- In an embodiment, the capture binding ligand further comprises an attachment linker. In an embodiment, the initialization step comprises applying an electronic signal to said electrode.
- In an embodiment, said probe is attached to an electron transfer moiety (ETM). In an embodiment, the ETM is responsive to an input waveform. In an embodiment, the ETM is a metallocene. In an embodiment, the metallocene is a ferrocene. In an embodiment, the ferrocene is a ferrocene derivative. In an embodiment, the probe is covalently attached to the ETM.
- In an embodiment, the detecting comprises applying an input signal to said electrode. In an embodiment, the input signal generates an output waveform based substantially on electron transfer between said ETM and said electrode.
- In an embodiment, the electrode is gold.
- In an embodiment, the input signal is AC/DC offset. In an embodiment, the AC frequency ranges from 90-1000 Hz. In an embodiment, the AC voltage ranges from −150 to 880 mV rms. In an embodiment, electrode initialization is performed for 0.5 seconds. In an embodiment, electrode initialization is performed for 1 second. In an embodiment, electrode initialization is performed for 2 seconds. In an embodiment, electrode initialization is performed for 5 seconds. In an embodiment, electrode initialization is performed for 10 seconds. In an embodiment, electrode initialization is performed for longer than 10 seconds.
-
FIGS. 1A-1R illustrate a number of different compositions of the invention; the results are shown in Example 1 and 2 of PCT US99/01703, hereby expressly incorporated by reference.FIG. 1A depicts I, also referred to as P290.FIG. 1B depicts II, also referred to as P291.FIG. 1C depicts III, also referred to as W31.FIG. 1D depicts IV, also referred to as N6.FIG. 1E depicts V, also referred to as P292.FIG. 1F depicts II, also referred to as C23.FIG. 1G depicts VII, also referred to as C15.FIG. 1H depicts VIII, also referred to as C95.FIG. 1I depicts Y63.FIG. 1J depicts another compound of the invention.FIG. 1K depicts N11.FIG. 1L depicts C131, with a phosphoramidite group and a DMT protecting group.FIG. 1M depicts W38, also with a phosphoramidite group and a DMT protecting group.FIG. 1N depicts the commercially available moiety that enables “branching” to occur, as its incorporation into a growing oligonucleotide chain results in addition at both the DMT protected oxygens.FIG. 1O depicts glen, also with a phosphoramidite group and a DMT protecting group, that serves as a non-nucleic acid linker.FIGS. 1A to 1G and 1J are shown without the phosphoramidite and protecting groups (e.g. DMT) that are readily added.FIGS. 1P-1R show PS32, N6 and W97. -
FIGS. 2A-2C illustrate several embodiments for mismatch detection.FIG. 2 depicts the use of anelectrode 105 with a self-assembledmonolayer 15 comprising passivation agents and acapture probe 20 attached via anattachment linker 10. Thecapture probe 20 has aninterrogation position 25 that may comprise a mismatch with the detection position on thetarget sequence 120.FIG. 2A depicts thetarget sequence 120 comprising theETMs 135;FIG. 2B depicts the use of alabel probe 40 with theETMs 135. As will be appreciated by those in the art, amplification probes, label extender probes, etc. can also be used.FIG. 2C utilizes alabel probe 40 with thedetection position 25. Again, amplification probes, label extender probes, etc. can also be used. -
FIGS. 3A-3B illustrate different compositions of the invention.FIG. 3A depicts QW56 andFIG. 3B depicts QW80. -
FIG. 4 illustrates an overview of the electrode initialization protocol described by the present invention. -
FIGS. 5A-5B illustrate that electrode initialization improves CF results relating to Eo shifting. -
FIG. 6 illustrates that electrode initialization statistically improves CF results relating to score shifting. -
FIGS. 7A-7B illustrate that electrode initialization reduces low signal traces. -
FIGS. 8A-8F illustrates false heterozygotes observed without electrode initialization. -
FIGS. 9A-9D illustrates that electrode initialization eliminates false heterozygotes. -
FIG. 10 illustrates signal improvement at different electrode initialization time periods. -
FIG. 11 illustrates noise reduction at different electrode initialization time periods. -
FIGS. 12A-12B illustrate signal improvement at different electrode initialization time periods. -
FIGS. 13A-13B illustrate noise reduction at different electrode initialization time periods. -
FIG. 14 illustrates reduced background signals at different electrode initialization time periods. -
FIG. 15 illustrates reduced MS2 signals at different electrode initialization time periods. -
FIG. 16 illustrates increased signal-noise ratios at 2 and 5 second electrode initialization periods. -
FIG. 17 depicts a cystic fibrosis chip analysis showing that the electrode initialization reduces E0 variability and localizes it to the expected E0 of the ferrocene label. There are three identified probes, the wild type and two different alleles, MMQC1 HET1 and MMQC1 HET2. The control, e.g. no initialization, are the three left hand data samples. The EI(1) protocol is a sweep of 150 to +750 mV for 5 seconds, and the EI(2) protocol is a sweep of 150 to +750 mV for 2 seconds. In this case, the 5 second sweep localizes the E0 better than either no EI or a 2 second EI. -
FIG. 18 shows the score shifting that happens on a cystic fibrosis chip, as the EI reduces non-specific binding (FIG. 18 ) and improves scores for the affected analytes (seeFIG. 19 ). The EI protocols are as described inFIG. 17 . -
FIGS. 19A and 19B show the improved scores for particular analytes. -
FIGS. 20A and 20B depicts the reduction of low signal miscalls, as EI improves the scores, as signals just above threshold show improved scores. -
FIGS. 21A and 21B show the elimination of the tailing effect in signal trace that can cause poor curve fit. -
FIGS. 22A-22D , from a respiratory viral panel chip, shows the effectiveness of the EI protocols (in this case using 0.5, 2, 5 and 10 second sweep) in reducing the variability of the signals. In addition,FIG. 22 shows that some targets are more affected than others and that different EI times can be used for different electrodes. -
FIG. 23 , also from a RVP chip, shows that the EI protocols background signal improves signals across different chips and samples. The background is observed with non-amplified PCR buffers or Qiagen buffer. - The present invention is directed to the use of signal processing methods for use in the electrochemical detection of target analytes on the surface of a monolayer. In general, in any system, the observed signal is a combination of signal from the target analyte (sample signal) and signal from the background, or noise. The present invention is directed to techniques that provide variations in initiation signals (e.g. varying the “input”) that can be used to increase the signal, decrease the noise, or make the signal more obvious or detectable in a background of noise.
- Accordingly, the present invention provides compositions and methods directed to an electrode initialization step for the electrochemical treatment of monolayers used in electron transfer detection methods. Electrode initialization creates a more stable monolayer, and resolves variability within the electrochemical signal detected on the monolayer.
- In particular, the electrode initialization methods outlined herein provide surprising benefits in three separate ways. First of all, in some cases, due to variations in the reference electrode, the potential at which the electrochemical label oxidizes, usually ferrocene and ferrocene derivatives as outlined herein, is shifted as a result of the these variations in the reference electrode. This can result in a poor fit of the signal trace by the assay software, and can lead in some cases to miscalls of sequence. Secondly, due to the presence of non-specific labels which can settle near the electrode, the score is shifted closer to an indeterminate boundary of the assay's calling parameters. The score in this case (seen in the figures) is the ratio of the wild-type signal to the mismatch signal (WT:MT). This can result in a “no call”, or in extreme cases, a miscall. Finally, if a sample is poorly processed, a signal can be generated which barely exceeds signal threshold, but is incorrectly fit due to the shape of the signal trace. As above, this can result in a “no call”, or in extreme cases, a miscall. All three of these issues have been successfully and surprisingly addressed by the present invention.
- Furthermore, due to the fact that the individual working electrodes in the systems of the invention are independently addressable, each “pad” or electrode can be initialized separately, depending on the capture ligands, probes, etc. That is, the affinity of different label probes within a multiplex assay to different electrodes with different capture probes may be different, as shown in the Figures. Thus, the ability to initialize different electrodes with different capture probes leads to increased signal to noise ratios.
- In general, any assay that relies on electrochemical detection will benefit from the present invention. The present invention finds particular use in systems generally described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,591,578, 5,824,473, 5,770,369, 5,705,348 5,780,234, 6,686,150 and 7,090,804, 7,935,481, and PCT application WO98/20162, all of which are expressly incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. These systems rely on the use of capture binding ligands (called capture probes when the target analyte is a nucleic acid) to anchor target analytes to the electrode surface and form an assay complex. The assay complex further comprises an electron transfer moiety (ETM) that is directly or indirectly attached to the target analyte. That is, the presence of the ETM near the electrode surface is dependent on the presence of the target analyte. Electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode is initiated using a variety of techniques as outlined below, and the output signals received and optionally processed as further outlined below. Thus, by detecting electron transfer, the presence or absence of the target analyte is determined.
- The compositions and methods provided herein are related to the detection of the presence of a target analyte in a sample. As will be appreciated by those in the art, the sample solution may comprise any number of things, including, but not limited to, bodily fluids (including, but not limited to, blood, urine, serum, lymph, saliva, anal and vaginal secretions, perspiration and semen, of virtually any organism, with mammalian samples being preferred and human samples being particularly preferred); environmental samples (including, but not limited to, air, agricultural, water and soil samples); biological warfare agent samples; research samples (e.g. in the case of nucleic acids, the sample may be the products of an amplification reaction, including both target and signal amplification as is generally described in PCT/US99/01705, such as PCR amplification reaction); purified samples, such as purified genomic DNA, RNA, proteins, etc.; raw samples (bacteria, virus, genomic DNA, etc.; As will be appreciated by those in the art, virtually any experimental manipulation may have been done on the sample.
- The compositions and methods are directed to the detection of target analytes. By “target analytes” or grammatical equivalents herein is meant any molecule or compound to be detected. As outlined below, target analytes preferably bind to binding ligands, as is more fully described below. As will be appreciated by those in the art, a large number of analytes may be detected using the present methods; basically, any target analyte for which a binding ligand, described below, may be made may be detected using the methods of the invention.
- Suitable analytes include organic and inorganic molecules, including biomolecules. In an embodiment, the analyte may be an environmental pollutant (including pesticides, insecticides, toxins, etc.); a chemical (including solvents, organic materials, etc.); therapeutic molecules (including therapeutic and abused drugs, antibiotics, etc.); biomolecules (including hormones, cytokines, proteins, lipids, carbohydrates, cellular membrane antigens and receptors (neural, hormonal, nutrient, and cell surface receptors) or their ligands, etc); whole cells (including procaryotic (such as pathogenic bacteria) and eucaryotic cells, including mammalian tumor cells); viruses (including retroviruses, herpesviruses, adenoviruses, lentiviruses, etc.); and spores; etc. Analytes can be environmental pollutants; nucleic acids; proteins (including enzymes, antibodies, antigens, growth factors, cytokines, etc); therapeutic and abused drugs; cells; and viruses.
- Target analytes can include proteins and nucleic acids. “Protein” as used herein includes proteins, polypeptides, and peptides. The protein may be made up of naturally occurring amino acids and peptide bonds, or synthetic peptidomimetic structures. The side chains may be in either the (R) or the (S) configuration. In an embodiment, the amino acids are in the (S) or L-configuration. If non-naturally occurring side chains are used, non-amino acid substituents may be used, for example to prevent or retard in vivo degradations.
- Suitable protein target analytes include, but are not limited to, (1) immunoglobulins, particularly IgEs, IgGs and IgMs, and particularly therapeutically or diagnostically relevant antibodies, including but not limited to, for example, antibodies to human albumin, apolipoproteins (including apolipoprotein E), human chorionic gonadotropin, cortisol, α-fetoprotein, thyroxin, thyroid stimulating hormone (TSH), antithrombin, antibodies to pharmaceuticals (including antieptileptic drugs (phenyloin, primidone, carbariezepin, ethosuximide, valproic acid, and phenobarbitol), cardioactive drugs (digoxin, lidocaine, procainamide, and disopyramide), bronchodilators (theophylline), antibiotics (chloramphenicol, sulfonamides), antidepressants, immunosuppresants, abused drugs (amphetamine, methamphetamine, cannabinoids, cocaine and opiates) and antibodies to any number of viruses (including orthomyxoviruses, (e.g. influenza virus), paramyxoviruses (e.g respiratory syncytial virus, mumps virus, measles virus), adenoviruses, rhinoviruses, coronaviruses, reoviruses, togaviruses (e.g. rubella virus), parvoviruses, poxviruses (e.g. variola virus, vaccinia virus), enteroviruses (e.g. poliovirus, coxsackievirus), hepatitis viruses (including A, B and C), herpesviruses (e.g. Herpes simplex virus, varicella-zoster virus, cytomegalovirus, Epstein-Barr virus), rotaviruses, Norwalk viruses, hantavirus, arenavirus, rhabdovirus (e.g. rabies virus), retroviruses (including HIV, HTLV-I and -II), papovaviruses (e.g. papillomavirus), polyomaviruses, and picornaviruses, and the like), and bacteria (including a wide variety of pathogenic and non-pathogenic prokaryotes of interest including Bacillus; Vibrio, e.g. V. cholerae; Escherichia, e.g. Enterotoxigenic E. coli, Shigella, e.g. S. dysenteriae; Salmonella, e.g. S. typhi; Mycobacterium e.g. M. tuberculosis, M. Ieprae; Clostridium, e.g. C. botulinum, C. tetani, C. difficile, C. perfringens; Cornyebacterium, e.g. C. diphtheriae; Streptococcus, S. pyogenes, S. pneumoniae; Staphylococcus, e.g. S. aureus; Haemophilus, e.g. H. influenzae; Neisseria, e.g. N. meningitidis, N. gonorrhoeae; Yersinia, e.g. G. lamblia Y. pestis, Pseudomonas, e.g. P. aeruginosa, P. putida; Chlamydia, e.g. C. trachomatis; Bordetella, e.g. B. pertussis; Treponema, e.g. T. palladium; and the like); (2) enzymes (and other proteins), including but not limited to, enzymes used as indicators of or treatment for heart disease, including creatine kinase, lactate dehydrogenase, aspartate amino transferase, troponin T, myoglobin, fibrinogen, cholesterol, triglycerides, thrombin, tissue plasminogen activator (tPA); pancreatic disease indicators including amylase, lipase, chymotrypsin and trypsin; liver function enzymes and proteins including cholinesterase, bilirubin, and alkaline phosphotase; aldolase, prostatic acid phosphatase, terminal deoxynucleotidyl transferase, and bacterial and viral enzymes such as HIV protease; (3) hormones and cytokines (many of which serve as ligands for cellular receptors) such as erythropoietin (EPO), thrombopoietin (TPO), the interleukins (including IL-1 through IL-17), insulin, insulin-like growth factors (including IGF-1 and -2), epidermal growth factor (EGF), transforming growth factors (including TGF-α. and TGF-βhuman growth hormone, transferrin, epidermal growth factor (EGF), low density lipoprotein, high density lipoprotein, leptin, VEGF, PDGF, ciliary neurotrophic factor, prolactin, adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH), calcitonin, human chorionic gonadotropin, cotrisol, estradiol, follicle stimulating hormone (FSH), thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH), leutinzing hormone (LH), progeterone and testosterone; and (4) other proteins (including α-fetoprotein, carcinoembryonic antigen CEA, cancer markers, etc.).
- In addition, any of the biomolecules for which antibodies may be detected may be detected directly as well; that is, detection of virus or bacterial cells, therapeutic and abused drugs, etc., may be done directly.
- Suitable target analytes include carbohydrates, including but not limited to, markers for breast cancer (CA15-3, CA 549, CA 27.29), mucin-like carcinoma associated antigen (MCA), ovarian cancer (CA125), pancreatic cancer (DE-PAN-2), prostate cancer (PSA), CEA, and colorectal and pancreatic cancer (CA 19,
CA 50, CA242). - Suitable target analytes include metal ions, particularly heavy and/or toxic metals, including but not limited to, aluminum, arsenic, cadmium, selenium, cobalt, copper, chromium, lead, silver and nickel.
- Target analytes can be nucleic acids. In an embodiment, the target analyte is a nucleic acid, and target sequences are detected. The term “target sequence” or “target nucleic acid” or grammatical equivalents herein means a nucleic acid sequence on a single strand of nucleic acid. The target sequence may be a portion of a gene, a regulatory sequence, genomic DNA, cDNA, RNA including mRNA and rRNA, or others. It may be any length, with the understanding that longer sequences are more specific. As will be appreciated by those in the art, the complementary target sequence may take many forms. For example, it may be contained within a larger nucleic acid sequence, e.g. all or part of a gene or mRNA, a restriction fragment of a plasmid or genomic DNA, among others. As is outlined more fully below, probes are made to hybridize to target sequences to determine the presence or absence of the target sequence in a sample. Generally speaking, this term will be understood by those skilled in the art. The target sequence may also be comprised of different target domains; for example, a first target domain of the sample target sequence may hybridize to a capture probe or a portion of capture extender probe, a second target domain may hybridize to a portion of an amplifier probe, a label probe, or a different capture or capture extender probe, etc. The target domains may be adjacent or separated. The terms “first” and “second” are not meant to confer an orientation of the sequences with respect to the 5′-3′ orientation of the target sequence. For example, assuming a 5′-3′ orientation of the complementary target sequence, the first target domain may be located either 5′ to the second domain, or 3′ to the second domain.
- By “nucleic acid” or “oligonucleotide” or grammatical equivalents herein means at least two nucleotides covalently linked together. A nucleic acid of the present invention will generally contain phosphodiester bonds, although in some cases, as outlined below, nucleic acid analogs are included that may have alternate backbones, comprising, for example, phosphoramide (Beaucage et al., Tetrahedron 49(10):1925 (1993) and references therein; Letsinger, J. Org. Chem. 35:3800 (1970); Sprinzl et al., Eur. J. Biochem. 81:579 (1977); Letsinger et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 14:3487 (1986); Sawai et al, Chem. Lett. 805 (1984), Letsinger et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 110:4470 (1988); and Pauwels et al., Chemica Scripta 26:141 91986)), phosphorothioate (Mag et al., Nucleic Acids Res. 19:1437 (1991); and U.S. Pat. No. 5,644,048), phosphorodithioate (Briu et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 111:2321 (1989), O-methylphophoroamidite linkages (see Eckstein, Oligonucleotides and Analogues: A Practical Approach, Oxford University Press), and peptide nucleic acid backbones and linkages (see Egholm, J. Am. Chem. Soc. 114:1895 (1992); Meier et al., Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 31:1008 (1992); Nielsen, Nature, 365:566 (1993); Carlsson et al., Nature 380:207 (1996), all of which are incorporated by reference). Other analog nucleic acids include those with positive backbones (Denpcy et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 92:6097 (1995); non-ionic backbones (U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,386,023, 5,637,684, 5,602,240, 5,216,141 and 4,469,863; Kiedrowshi et al., Angew. Chem. Intl. Ed. English 30:423 (1991); Letsinger et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 110:4470 (1988); Letsinger et al., Nucleoside & Nucleotide 13:1597 (1994);
Chapters Chapters - As will be appreciated by those in the art, all of these nucleic acid analogs may find use in the present invention. In addition, mixtures of naturally occurring nucleic acids and analogs can be made; for example, at the site of an ETM attachment, or an analog structure may be used. Alternatively, mixtures of different nucleic acid analogs, and mixtures of naturally occurring nucleic acids and analogs may be made.
- An embodiment includes peptide nucleic acids (PNA) which includes peptide nucleic acid analogs. These backbones are substantially non-ionic under neutral conditions, in contrast to the highly charged phosphodiester backbone of naturally occurring nucleic acids. This results in two advantages. First, the PNA backbone exhibits improved hybridization kinetics. PNAs have larger changes in the melting temperature (Tm) for mismatched versus perfectly matched basepairs. DNA and RNA typically exhibit a 2-4° C. drop in Tm for an internal mismatch. With the non-ionic PNA backbone, the drop is closer to 7-9° C. This allows for better detection of mismatches. Similarly, due to their non-ionic nature, hybridization of the bases attached to these backbones is relatively insensitive to salt concentration.
- The nucleic acids may be single stranded or double stranded, as specified, or contain portions of both double stranded or single stranded sequence. The nucleic acid may be DNA, both genomic and cDNA, RNA or a hybrid, where the nucleic acid contains any combination of deoxyribo- and ribo-nucleotides, and any combination of bases, including uracil, adenine, thymine, cytosine, guanine, inosine, xanthine hypoxanthine, isocytosine, isoguanine, etc. An embodiment utilizes isocytosine and isoguanine in nucleic acids designed to be complementary to other probes, rather than target sequences, as this reduces non-specific hybridization, as is generally described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,681,702. As used herein, the term “nucleoside” includes nucleotides as well as nucleoside and nucleotide analogs, and modified nucleosides such as amino modified nucleosides. In addition, “nucleoside” includes non-naturally occurring analog structures. Thus for example the individual units of a peptide nucleic acid, each containing a base, are referred to herein as a nucleoside.
- The target analyte can be amplified when the target is a nucleic acid. Target amplification involves the amplification (replication) of the target sequence to be detected, such that the number of copies of the target sequence is increased. Suitable target amplification techniques include, but are not limited to, the polymerase chain reaction (PCR), strand displacement amplification (SDA), and nucleic acid sequence based amplification (NASBA).
- The compositions and methods of the present invention comprise electrodes. By “electrode” herein is meant a composition, which, when connected to an electronic device, is able to sense a current or charge and convert it to a signal. Alternatively an electrode can be defined as a composition which can apply a potential to and/or pass electrons to or from species in the solution. Thus, an electrode can be an ETM as described herein. Electrodes are known in the art and include, but are not limited to, certain metals and their oxides, including gold; platinum; palladium; silicon; aluminum; metal oxide electrodes including platinum oxide, titanium oxide, tin oxide, indium tin oxide, palladium oxide, silicon oxide, aluminum oxide, molybdenum oxide (MO2O6), tungsten oxide (WO3) and ruthenium oxides; and carbon (including glassy carbon electrodes, graphite and carbon paste). Electrodes include gold, silicon, platinum, carbon and metal oxide electrodes.
- The conformation of the electrode will vary with the detection method used. For example, flat planar electrodes can be used for optical detection methods, or when arrays of nucleic acids are made, thus requiring addressable locations for both synthesis and detection. Alternatively, for single probe analysis, the electrode may be in the form of a tube, with SAMs comprising capture binding ligands to the inner surface. Electrode coils can be used in some embodiments as well. This allows a maximum of surface area containing the target analytes to be exposed to a small volume of sample.
- In an embodiment, the detection electrodes are formed on a substrate. In addition, the discussion herein is generally directed to the formation of gold electrodes, but as will be appreciated by those in the art, other electrodes can be used as well. The substrate can comprise a wide variety of materials, as will be appreciated by those in the art, such as printed circuit board (PCB) materials. Thus, in general, the suitable substrates include, but are not limited to, fiberglass, teflon, ceramics, glass, silicon, mica, plastic (including acrylics, polystyrene and copolymers of styrene and other materials, polypropylene, polyethylene, polybutylene, polycarbonate, polyurethanes, Teflon™, and derivatives thereof, etc.), GETEK (a blend of polypropylene oxide and fiberglass), etc. In some embodiments, glass may not be preferred as a substrate.
- In general, materials can include printed circuit board materials. Circuit board materials are those that comprise an insulating substrate that is coated with a conducting layer and processed using lithography techniques, particularly photolithography techniques, to form the patterns of electrodes and interconnects (sometimes referred to in the art as interconnections or leads). The insulating substrate is generally, but not always, a polymer. As is known in the art, one or a plurality of layers may be used, to make either “two dimensional” (e.g. all electrodes and interconnections in a plane) or “three dimensional” (wherein the electrodes are on one surface and the interconnects may go through the board to the other side) boards. Three dimensional systems frequently rely on the use of drilling or etching, followed by electroplating with a metal such as copper, such that the “through board” interconnections are made. Circuit board materials are often provided with a foil already attached to the substrate, such as a copper foil, with additional copper added as needed (for example for interconnections), for example by electroplating. The copper surface may then need to be roughened, for example through etching, to allow attachment of the adhesion layer.
- The present system finds particular utility in array formats, e.g. wherein there is a matrix of addressable detection electrodes (herein generally referred to “pads”, “addresses” or “micro-locations”). By “array” herein is meant a plurality of capture ligands in an array format; the size of the array will depend on the composition and end use of the array. Arrays containing from about 2 different capture ligands to many thousands can be made. Generally, the array will comprise from two to as many as 100,000 or more, depending on the size of the electrodes, as well as the end use of the array. Ranges can be from about 2 to about 10,000, from about 5 to about 1000, and from about 10 to about 100. In some embodiments, the compositions of the invention may not be in array format; that is, for some embodiments, compositions comprising a single capture ligand may be made as well. In addition, in some arrays, multiple substrates may be used, either of different or identical compositions. Thus for example, large arrays may comprise a plurality of smaller substrates.
- Accordingly, in an embodiment, the present invention provides biochips (sometimes referred to herein “chips”) that comprise substrates comprising a plurality of electrodes, preferably gold electrodes. The number of electrodes is as outlined for arrays. Each electrode preferably comprises a self-assembled monolayer as outlined herein. In an embodiment, one of the monolayer-forming species comprises a capture ligand as outlined herein. In addition, each electrode has an interconnection that is attached to the electrode at one end and is ultimately attached to a device that can control the electrode sometimes through multiplexed devices, (e.g. MUX). That is, each electrode is independently addressable.
- The substrates can be part of a larger device comprising a detection chamber that exposes a given volume of sample to the detection electrode. Generally, the detection chamber ranges from about 1 nL to 1 ml, with about 10 μL to 500 μL being preferred. As will be appreciated by those in the art, depending on the experimental conditions and assay, smaller or larger volumes may be used.
- In some embodiments, the detection chamber and electrode are part of a cartridge that can be placed into a device comprising electronic components (an AC/DC voltage source, an ammeter, a processor, a read-out display, temperature controller, light source, etc.). In this embodiment, the interconnections from each electrode are positioned such that upon insertion of the cartridge into the device, connections between the electrodes and the electronic components are established. In some embodiments, the connections from the electrodes are made by passing through the substrate to produce a so called land grid array that can interface to a pogo pin or like connector to make connections from the chip to the instrument. In this embodiment, pogo pin connectors are used in place of edge card connectors. In this embodiment, rather than contain longer interconnects, the electrode array is one surface of the substrate, such as a PCR board or ceramic substrate, and there are “through board” or “through substrate” interconnects ending in pads. When the cartridge is placed in the device, these pads contact “pogo pin” type connectors, thus saving space on the chip and allowing for higher density arrays, if desired. In some embodiments, switching circuitry (multiplexers) can be built into the pogo pin connector. These embodiments are described in US publication 2011/0180425, herein incorporated by reference in its entirety.
- Detection electrodes on circuit board material (or other substrates) are generally prepared in a wide variety of ways. In general, high purity gold is used, and it may be deposited on a surface via vacuum deposition processes (sputtering and evaporation) or solution deposition (electroplating or electroless processes). When electroplating is done, the substrate must initially comprise a conductive material; fiberglass circuit boards are frequently provided with copper foil. Frequently, depending on the substrate, an adhesion layer between the substrate and the gold in order to insure good mechanical stability is used. Thus, embodiments utilize a deposition layer of an adhesion metal such as chromium, titanium, titanium/tungsten, tantalum, nickel or palladium, which can be deposited as above for the gold. When electroplated metal (either the adhesion metal or the electrode metal) is used, grain refining additives, frequently referred to in the trade as brighteners, can optionally be added to alter surface deposition properties. Brighteners are mixtures of organic and inorganic species, with cobalt and nickel being preferred.
- In general, the adhesion layer is from about 100 Å thick to about 25 microns (1000 microinches). If the adhesion metal is electrochemically active, the electrode metal must be coated at a thickness that prevents “bleed-through”; if the adhesion metal is not electrochemically active, the electrode metal may be thinner. Generally, the electrode metal (preferably gold) is deposited at thicknesses ranging from about 500 Å to about 5 microns (200 microinches), with from about 30 microinches to about 50 microinches being preferred. In general, the gold is deposited to make electrodes ranging in size from about 5 microns to about 5 mm in diameter, with about 100 to 250 microns being preferred. The detection electrodes thus formed are then preferably cleaned and SAMs added, as is discussed below.
- Thus, the present invention provides methods of making a substrate comprising a plurality of gold electrodes. The methods first comprise coating an adhesion metal, such as nickel or palladium (optionally with brightener), onto the substrate. Electroplating is preferred. The electrode metal, preferably gold, is then coated (again, with electroplating preferred) onto the adhesion metal. Then the patterns of the device, comprising the electrodes and their associated interconnections are made using lithographic techniques, particularly photolithographic techniques as are known in the art, and wet chemical etching. Frequently, a non-conductive chemically resistive insulating material such as solder mask or plastic is laid down using these photolithographic techniques, leaving only the electrodes and a connection point to the leads exposed; the leads themselves are generally coated.
- In addition to electronic components, the electrodes of the invention comprise monolayers, which can include self-assembled monolayers (SAMs). This basic mechanism is described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,591,578, 5,770,369, 5,705,348, and PCT US97/20014. Briefly, previous work has shown that electron transfer can proceed rapidly through the stacked I″-orbitals of double stranded nucleic acid, and significantly more slowly through single-stranded nucleic acid. Accordingly, this can serve as the basis of an assay. Thus, by adding ETMs (either covalently to one of the strands or non-covalently to the hybridization complex through the use of hybridization indicators, described below) to a nucleic acid that is attached to a detection electrode, electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode, through the nucleic acid, may be detected.
- Alternatively, the ETM can be detected, not necessarily via electron transfer through nucleic acid, but rather can be directly detected on an electrode comprising a SAM; that is, the electrons from the ETMs need not travel through the stacked π orbitals in order to generate a signal. As above, in this embodiment, the detection electrode preferably comprises a self-assembled monolayer (SAM) that serves to shield the electrode from redox-active species in the sample.
- Thus, in either embodiment, as is more fully outlined below, an assay complex is formed that contains an ETM, which is then detected using the detection electrode.
- Thus, in an embodiment, the electrode comprises a monolayer. As outlined herein, the efficiency of target analyte binding (for example, oligonucleotide hybridization) may increase when the analyte is at a distance from the electrode. Similarly, non-specific binding of biomolecules, including the target analytes, to an electrode is generally reduced when a monolayer is present. Thus, a monolayer facilitates the maintenance of the analyte away from the electrode surface. In addition, a monolayer serves to keep charged species away from the surface of the electrode. Thus, this layer helps to prevent electrical contact between the electrodes and the ETMs, or between the electrode and charged species within the solvent. Such contact can result in a direct “short circuit” or an indirect short circuit via charged species which may be present in the sample. Accordingly, the monolayer is preferably tightly packed in a uniform layer on the electrode surface, such that a minimum of “holes” exist. The monolayer thus serves as a physical barrier to block solvent accessibility to the electrode.
- By “monolayer” or “self-assembled monolayer” or “SAM” herein is meant a relatively ordered assembly of molecules spontaneously chemisorbed on a surface, in which the molecules are oriented approximately parallel to each other and roughly perpendicular to the surface. A majority of the molecules include a functional group that adheres to the surface, and a portion that interacts with neighboring molecules in the monolayer to form the relatively ordered array. A “mixed” monolayer comprises a heterogeneous monolayer, that is, where at least two different molecules make up the monolayer.
- In some embodiments, the monolayer comprises conductive oligomers. By “conductive oligomer” herein is meant a substantially conducting oligomer, preferably linear, some embodiments of which are referred to in the literature as “molecular wires.” By “substantially conducting” herein is meant that the oligomer is capable of transferring electrons at 100 Hz. Generally, the conductive oligomer has substantially overlapping π-orbitals, e.g. conjugated π-orbitals, as between the monomeric units of the conductive oligomer, although the conductive oligomer may also contain one or more sigma (σ) bonds. Additionally, a conductive oligomer may be defined functionally by its ability to inject or receive electrons into or from an associated ETM. Furthermore, the conductive oligomer is more conductive than the insulators as defined herein. Additionally, the conductive oligomers of the invention are to be distinguished from electroactive polymers, that themselves may donate or accept electrons. A variety of conductive oligomers are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,740,518, hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
- In an embodiment, the monolayer may comprise insulator moieties. By “insulator” herein is meant a substantially nonconducting oligomer, preferably linear. By “substantially nonconducting” herein is meant that the insulator will not transfer electrons at 100 Hz. The rate of electron transfer through the insulator is preferably slower than the rate through the conductive oligomers described herein.
- It will be appreciated that the monolayer may comprise different insulatory species, although preferably the different species are chosen such that a reasonably uniform SAM can be formed. Thus, for example, when nucleic acids are covalently attached to the electrode using insulators, it is possible to have one type of insulator used to attach the nucleic acid, and another type functioning to detect the ETM. Similarly, the use of different insulators may be done to facilitate monolayer formation, or to make monolayers with altered properties. In one embodiment, it is possible to use mixtures of insulators with different types of terminal groups, e.g. polyethylene glycol. Thus, for example, some of the terminal groups may facilitate detection, and some may prevent non-specific binding.
- In an embodiment, the insulators have a conductivity, S, of about 10−7 Ω−1cm−1 or lower, with less than about 10−8 Ω−1cm−1 being preferred. See generally Gardner et al., supra.
- Generally, insulators are alkyl or heteroalkyl oligomers or moieties with sigma bonds, although any particular insulator molecule may contain aromatic groups or one or more conjugated bonds. By “heteroalkyl” herein is meant an alkyl group that has at least one heteroatom, e.g. nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, silicon or boron included in the chain.
- Suitable insulators are known in the art, and include, but are not limited to, —(CH2)n—, —(CRH)n—, and —(CR2)n—, ethylene glycol or derivatives using other heteroatoms in place of oxygen, e.g. nitrogen or sulfur (sulfur derivatives are not preferred when the electrode is gold).
- The insulators may be substituted with R groups as defined herein to alter the packing of the moieties on an electrode, the hydrophilicity or hydrophobicity of the insulator, and the flexibility, e.g. the rotational, torsional or longitudinal flexibility of the insulator. For example, branched alkyl groups may be used. Similarly, the insulators may contain terminal groups, as outlined above, particularly to influence the surface of the monolayer.
- By “aromatic group” or grammatical equivalents herein is meant an aromatic monocyclic or polycyclic hydrocarbon moiety generally containing 5 to 14 carbon atoms (although larger polycyclic rings structures may be made) and any carbocylic ketone or thioketone derivative thereof, wherein the carbon atom with the free valence is a member of an aromatic ring. Aromatic groups include arylene groups and aromatic groups with more than two atoms removed. For the purposes of this application aromatic includes heterocycle. “Heterocycle” or “heteroaryl” means an aromatic group wherein 1 to 5 of the indicated carbon atoms are replaced by a heteroatom chosen from nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus, boron and silicon wherein the atom with the free valence is a member of an aromatic ring, and any heterocyclic ketone and thioketone derivative thereof. Thus, heterocycle includes thienyl, furyl, pyrrolyl, pyrimidinyl, oxalyl, indolyl, purinyl, quinolyl, isoquinolyl, thiazolyl, imidozyl, etc.
- Importantly, the Y aromatic groups may be different, e.g. a heterooligomer. That is, an oligomer may comprise an oligomer of a single type of Y groups, or of multiple types of Y groups.
- The aromatic group may be substituted with a substitution group, generally depicted herein as R. R groups may be added as necessary to affect the packing of the insulator, e.g. R groups may be used to alter the association of the oligomers in the monolayer. R groups may also be added to 1) alter the solubility of the oligomer or of compositions containing the oligomers; 2) alter the conjugation or electrochemical potential of the system; and 3) alter the charge or characteristics at the surface of the monolayer.
- In an embodiment, when the insulator is greater than three subunits, R groups are preferred to increase solubility when solution synthesis is done. However, the R groups, and their positions, are chosen to minimally affect the packing of the insulator on a surface, particularly within a monolayer, as described below. In general, only small R groups are used within the monolayer, with larger R groups generally above the surface of the monolayer. Thus for example the attachment of methyl groups to the portion of the insulator within the monolayer to increase solubility is preferred, with attachment of longer alkoxy groups, for example, C3 to C10, is preferably done above the monolayer surface. In general, for the systems described herein, this generally means that attachment of sterically significant R groups is not done on any of the first two or three oligomer subunits, depending on the average length of the molecules making up the monolayer.
- Suitable R groups include, but are not limited to, hydrogen, alkyl, alcohol, aromatic, amino, amido, nitro, ethers, esters, aldehydes, sulfonyl, silicon moieties, halogens, sulfur containing moieties, phosphorus containing moieties, and ethylene glycols. In the structures depicted herein, R is hydrogen when the position is unsubstituted. It should be noted that some positions may allow two substitution groups, R and R′, in which case the R and R′ groups may be either the same or different.
- By “alkyl group” or grammatical equivalents herein is meant a straight or branched chain alkyl group, with straight chain alkyl groups being preferred. If branched, it may be branched at one or more positions, and unless specified, at any position. The alkyl group may range from about 1 to about 30 carbon atoms (C1-C30), with an embodiment utilizing from about 1 to about 20 carbon atoms (C1-C20), with about C1 through about C12 to about C15 being preferred, and C1 to C5 being particularly preferred, although in some embodiments the alkyl group may be much larger. Also included within the definition of an alkyl group are cycloalkyl groups such as C5 and C6 rings, and heterocyclic rings with nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus. Alkyl also includes heteroalkyl, with heteroatoms of sulfur, oxygen, nitrogen, and silicone being preferred. Alkyl includes substituted alkyl groups. By “substituted alkyl group” herein is meant an alkyl group further comprising one or more substitution moieties “R”, as defined above.
- By “amino groups” or grammatical equivalents herein is meant —NH2, —NHR and —NR2 groups, with R being as defined herein.
- By “nitro group” herein is meant an —NO2 group.
- By “sulfur containing moieties” herein is meant compounds containing sulfur atoms, including but not limited to, thia-, thio- and sulfo-compounds, thiols (—SH and —SR), and sulfides (—RSR—). By “phosphorus containing moieties” herein is meant compounds containing phosphorus, including, but not limited to, phosphines and phosphates. By “silicon containing moieties” herein is meant compounds containing silicon.
- By “ether” herein is meant an —O—R group. Ethers can include alkoxy groups, with —O—(CH2)2CH3 and —O—(CH2)4CH3 being preferred.
- By “ester” herein is meant a —COOR group.
- By “halogen” herein is meant bromine, iodine, chlorine, or fluorine. Substituted alkyls can partially or fully halogenated alkyls such as CF3, etc.
- By “aldehyde” herein is meant —RCHO groups.
- By “alcohol” herein is meant —OH groups, and alkyl alcohols —ROH.
- By “amido” herein is meant —RCONH— or RCONR— groups.
- By “ethylene glycol” or “(poly)ethylene glycol” herein is meant a —(O—CH2—CH2)n— group, although each carbon atom of the ethylene group may also be singly or doubly substituted, e.g. —(O—CR2—CR2)n—, with R as described above. Ethylene glycol derivatives with other heteroatoms in place of oxygen (e.g. —(N—CH2—CH2)n— or —(S—CH2—CH2)n—, or with substitution groups) are also preferred.
- Substitution groups can include, but are not limited to, methyl, ethyl, propyl, alkoxy groups such as —O—(CH2)2CH3 and —O—(CH2)4CH3 and ethylene glycol and derivatives thereof.
- Aromatic groups can include, but are not limited to, phenyl, naphthyl, naphthalene, anthracene, phenanthroline, pyrole, pyridine, thiophene, porphyrins, and substituted derivatives of each of these, included fused ring derivatives.
- In an embodiment, the insulator species included in the SAM utilizes novel methods and compositions comprising asymmetric disulfides. As outlined herein, the signals generated from label probes can be dependent on the behavior or properties of the SAM. SAMs comprising “nanoconduits” or “electroconduits,” as outlined in U.S. Ser. No. 60/145,912 hereby expressly incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, give good signals. Thus, the present invention provides asymmetric insulators based on disulfides, wherein one of the arms being a longer alkyl chain (or other SAM forming species) and the other arm comprising either a shorter alkyl chain or a bulky group, such as a branched alkyl group, that can be polar or nonpolar) for creating the nanoconduits. Exemplary species and methods of making are described in U.S. Ser. No. 09/847,113. See also Mukaiyama Tetrahedron Lett. 1968, 5907; Boustany Tetrahedron Lett. 1970 3547; Harpp Tetrahedron Lett. 1970 3551; and Oae, J. Chem. Soc. Chem. Commun, 1977, 407, all of which are expressly incorporated herein by reference.
- The length of the species making up the monolayer will vary as needed. As outlined above, it appears that hybridization is more efficient at a distance from the surface. The species to which nucleic acids are attached can be basically the same length as the monolayer forming species or longer than them, resulting in the nucleic acids being more accessible to the solvent for hybridization.
- As will be appreciated by those in the art, the actual combinations and ratios of the different species making up the monolayer can vary widely. Two component systems utilize a first species comprising a capture probe containing species, attached to the electrode via either an insulator. The second species are insulators. In this embodiment, the first species can comprise from about 90% to about 1%, with from about 20% to about 40% being preferred. For nucleic acids, from about 30% to about 40% is especially preferred for short oligonucleotide targets and from about 10% to about 20% is preferred for longer targets. The second species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 20% to about 90% being preferred, and from about 40% to about 60% being especially preferred. The third species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 20% to about 40% being preferred, and from about 15% to about 30% being especially preferred. To achieve these approximate proportions, preferred ratios of first:second:third species in SAM formation solvents are 2:2:1 for short targets, 1:3:1 for longer targets, with total thiol concentration (when used to attach these species, as is more fully outlined below) in the 500 μM to 1 mM range, and 833 μM being preferred.
- Alternatively, two component systems can be used. In one embodiment, the two components are the first and second species. In this embodiment, the first species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 1% to about 40% being preferred, and from about 10% to about 40% being especially preferred. The second species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 10% to about 60% being preferred, and from about 20% to about 40% being especially preferred. Alternatively, the two components are the first and the third species. In this embodiment, the first species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 1% to about 40% being preferred, and from about 10% to about 40% being especially preferred. The second species can comprise from about 1% to about 90%, with from about 10% to about 60% being preferred, and from about 20% to about 40% being especially preferred.
- In an embodiment, the deposition of the SAM is done using aqueous solvents. As is generally described in Steel et al., Anal. Chem. 70:4670 (1998), Herne et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 119:8916 (1997), and Finklea, Electrochemistry of Organized Monolayers of Thiols and Related Molecules on Electrodes, from A. J. Bard, Electroanalytical Chemistry: A Series of Advances, Vol. 20, Dekker N.Y. 1966-, all of which are expressly incorporated by reference, the deposition of the SAM-forming species can be done out of aqueous solutions, frequently comprising salt.
- The covalent attachment of the insulators may be accomplished in a variety of ways, depending on the electrode and the composition of the insulators used. In an embodiment, the attachment linkers with covalently attached nucleosides or nucleic acids as depicted herein are covalently attached to an electrode. Thus, one end or terminus of the attachment linker is attached to the nucleoside or nucleic acid, and the other is attached to an electrode. In some embodiments it may be desirable to have the attachment linker attached at a position other than a terminus, or even to have a branched attachment linker that is attached to an electrode at one terminus and to two or more nucleosides at other termini, although this is not preferred. Similarly, the attachment linker may be attached at two sites to the electrode, as is generally depicted in Structures 2-4. Generally, some type of linker is used, as depicted below as “A” in Structure 1, where “X” is A a conductive oligomer, “I” is an insulator and the hatched surface is the electrode:
- In this embodiment, A is a linker or atom. The choice of “A” will depend in part on the characteristics of the electrode. Thus, for example, A may be a sulfur moiety when a gold electrode is used. Alternatively, when metal oxide electrodes are used, A may be a silicon (silane) moiety attached to the oxygen of the oxide (see for example Chen et al., Langmuir 10:3332-3337 (1994); Lenhard et al., J. Electroanal. Chem. 78:195-201 (1977), both of which are expressly incorporated by reference). When carbon based electrodes are used, A may be an amino moiety (preferably a primary amine; see for example Deinhammer et al., Langmuir 10:1306-1313 (1994)). Thus, A moieties include, but are not limited to, silane moieties, sulfur moieties (including alkyl sulfur moieties), and amino moieties. In an embodiment, epoxide type linkages with redox polymers such as are known in the art are not used.
- Although depicted herein as a single moiety, insulators may be attached to the electrode with more than one “A” moiety; the “A” moieties may be the same or different. Thus, for example, when the electrode is a gold electrode, and “A” is a sulfur atom or moiety, multiple sulfur atoms may be used to attach an insulator to the electrode, such as is generally depicted below in
Structures Structures - Many of the structures herein depict conductive oligomers as the attachment linkers, or provide an option as a conductive oligomer or insulator (e.g. “X or I”), but insulators such as alkyl chains are preferred in many embodiments.
- It should also be noted that similar to
Structure 4, it may be possible to have an insulator terminating in a single carbon atom with three sulfur moities attached to the electrode. Additionally, although not always depicted herein, the insulators may also comprise a “Q” terminal group. - In an embodiment, the electrode is a gold electrode, and attachment is via a sulfur linkage as is well known in the art, e.g. the A moiety is a sulfur atom or moiety. Although the exact characteristics of the gold-sulfur attachment are not known, this linkage is considered covalent for the purposes of this invention. A representative structure is depicted in
Structure 5. Similarly, any of the insulators may also comprise terminal groups as described herein.Structure 5 depicts the “A” linker as comprising just a sulfur atom, although additional atoms may be present (e.g. substitution groups). In addition,Structure 5 shows the sulfur atom attached to the Y aromatic group, but as will be appreciated by those in the art, it may be attached to the B-D group (e.g. an acetylene) as well. - In an embodiment, the electrode is a carbon electrode, e.g. a glassy carbon electrode, and attachment is via a nitrogen of an amine group. A representative structure is depicted in
Structure 6. Again, additional atoms may be present, e.g. Z type linkers and/or terminal groups. - In
Structure 7, the oxygen atom is from the oxide of the metal oxide electrode. The Si atom may be combined with other atoms, e.g. be a silicon moiety containing substitution groups. Other attachments for SAMs to other electrodes are known in the art; see for example Napier et al., Langmuir, 1997, for attachment to indium tin oxide electrodes, and also the chemisorption of phosphates to an indium tin oxide electrode (talk by H. Holden Thorpe, CHI conference, May 4-5, 1998). - The SAMs of the invention can be made in a variety of ways, including deposition out of organic solutions and deposition out of aqueous solutions. The methods outlined herein use a gold electrode as the example, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, other metals and methods may be used as well. In one embodiment, indium-tin-oxide (ITO) is used as the electrode.
- In an embodiment, a gold surface is first cleaned. A variety of cleaning procedures may be employed, including, but not limited to, chemical cleaning or etchants including Piranha solution (hydrogen peroxide/sulfuric acid) or aqua regia (hydrochloric acid/nitric acid), electrochemical methods, flame treatment, plasma treatment or combinations thereof.
- Following cleaning, the gold substrate is exposed to the SAM species. When the electrode is ITO, the SAM species are phosphonate-containing species. This can also be done in a variety of ways, including, but not limited to, solution deposition, gas phase deposition, microcontact printing, spray deposition, deposition using neat components, etc. An embodiment utilizes a deposition solution comprising a mixture of various SAM species in solution, generally thiol-containing species. Mixed monolayers that contain nucleic acids are usually prepared using a two step procedure. The thiolated nucleic acid is deposited during the first deposition step (generally in the presence of at least one other monolayer-forming species) and the mixed monolayer formation is completed during the second step in which a second thiol solution minus nucleic acid is added. Optionally, a second step utilizing mild heating to promote monolayer reorganization.
- In an embodiment, the deposition solution is an organic deposition solution. In this embodiment, a clean gold surface is placed into a clean vial. A binding ligand deposition solution in organic solvent is prepared in which the total thiol concentration is between micromolar to saturation; preferred ranges include from about 1 μM to 10 mM, with from about 400 uM to about 1.0 mM being especially preferred. In an embodiment, the deposition solution contains thiol modified DNA (e.g. nucleic acid attached to an attachment linker) and thiol diluent molecules. The ratio of nucleic acid to diluent (if present) is usually between 1000:1 to 1:1000, with from about 10:1 to about 1:10 being preferred and 1:1 being especially preferred. Solvents can be tetrahydrofuran (THF), acetonitrile, dimethylforamide (DMF), ethanol, or mixtures thereof; generally any solvent of sufficient polarity to dissolve the capture ligand can be used, as long as the solvent is devoid of functional groups that will react with the surface. Sufficient nucleic acid deposition solution is added to the vial so as to completely cover the electrode surface. The gold substrate is allowed to incubate at ambient temperature or slightly above ambient temperature for a period of time ranging from seconds to hours, with 5-30 minutes being preferred. After the initial incubation, the deposition solution is removed and a solution of diluent molecule only (from about 1 μM to 10 mM, with from about 100 uM to about 1.0 mM being preferred) in organic solvent is added. The gold substrate is allowed to incubate at room temperature or above room temperature for a period of time (seconds to days, with from about 10 minutes to about 24 hours being preferred). The gold sample is removed from the solution, rinsed in clean solvent and used.
- In an embodiment, an aqueous deposition solution is used. As above, a clean gold surface is placed into a clean vial. A nucleic acid deposition solution in water is prepared in which the total thiol concentration is between about 1 uM and 10 mM, with from about 1 μM to about 200 uM being preferred. The aqueous solution frequently has salt present (up to saturation, with approximately 1M being preferred), however pure water can be used. The deposition solution contains thiol modified nucleic acid and often a thiol diluent molecule. The ratio of nucleic acid to diluent is usually between 1000:1 to 1:1000, with from about 10:1 to about 1:10 being preferred and 1:1 being especially preferred. The nucleic acid deposition solution is added to the vial in such a volume so as to completely cover the electrode surface. The gold substrate is allowed to incubate at ambient temperature or slightly above ambient temperature for 1-30 minutes with 5 minutes usually being sufficient. After the initial incubation, the deposition solution is removed and a solution of diluent molecule only (10 uM-1.0 mM) in either water or organic solvent is added. The gold substrate is allowed to incubate at room temperature or above room temperature until a complete monolayer is formed (10 minutes-24 hours). The gold sample is removed from the solution, rinsed in clean solvent and used.
- In an embodiment, the deposition solution comprises a zwitterionic compound, preferably betaine. Preferred embodiments utilize betaine and Tris-HCl buffers.
- In an embodiment, as outlined herein, a circuit board is used as the substrate for the gold electrodes. Formation of the SAMs on the gold surface is generally done by first cleaning the boards, for example in a 10% sulfuric acid solution for 30 seconds, detergent solutions, aqua regia, plasma, etc., as outlined herein. Following the sulfuric acid treatment, the boards are washed, for example via immersion in two Milli-Q water baths for 1 minute each. The boards are then dried, for example under a stream of nitrogen. Spotting of the deposition solution onto the boards is done using any number of known spotting systems, generally by placing the boards on an X-Y table, preferably in a humidity chamber. The size of the spotting drop will vary with the size of the electrodes on the boards and the equipment used for delivery of the solution; for example, for 250 μM size electrodes, a 30 nanoliter drop is used. The volume should be sufficient to cover the electrode surface completely. The drop is incubated at room temperature for a period of time (sec to overnight, with 5 minutes preferred) and then the drop is removed by rinsing in a Milli-Q water bath. The boards are then optionally treated with a second deposition solution, generally comprising insulator in organic solvent, preferably acetonitrile, by immersion in a 45° C. bath. After 30 minutes, the boards are removed and immersed in an acetonitrile bath for 30 seconds followed by a milli-Q water bath for 30 seconds. The boards are dried under a stream of nitrogen. Preferably, only the water rinse is employed.
- In an embodiment, the detection electrode comprising the SAM further comprises capture binding ligands, preferably covalently attached. By “binding ligand” or “binding species” herein is meant a compound that is used to probe for the presence of the target analyte that will bind to the target analyte. In general, for most of the embodiments described herein, there are at least two binding ligands used per target analyte molecule; a “capture” or “anchor” binding ligand (also referred to herein as a “capture probe”, particularly in reference to a nucleic acid binding ligand) that is attached to the detection electrode as described herein, and a soluble binding ligand (frequently referred to herein as a “signaling probe” or a “label probe”), that binds independently to the target analyte, and either directly or indirectly comprises at least one ETM. However, it should be noted that for some nucleic acid detection systems, the target sequence is generally amplified, and during amplification, a label is added; thus these systems generally comprise only two elements, the capture probe and the labeled target. The discussion below is directed to the use of electrodes and electrochemical detection, but as will be appreciated by those in the art, fluorescent based systems can be used as well.
- Generally, the capture binding ligand allows the attachment of a target analyte to the detection electrode, for the purposes of detection. As is more fully outlined below, attachment of the target analyte to the capture binding ligand may be direct (e.g. the target analyte binds to the capture binding ligand) or indirect (one or more capture extender ligands may be used).
- In an embodiment, the binding is specific, and the binding ligand is part of a binding pair. By “specifically bind” herein is meant that the ligand binds the analyte, with specificity sufficient to differentiate between the analyte and other components or contaminants of the test sample. However, as will be appreciated by those in the art, it will be possible to detect analytes using binding that is not highly specific; for example, the systems may use different binding ligands, for example an array of different ligands, and detection of any particular analyte is via its “signature” of binding to a panel of binding ligands, similar to the manner in which “electronic noses” work. The binding should be sufficient to allow the analyte to remain bound under the conditions of the assay, including wash steps to remove non-specific binding. In some embodiments, for example in the detection of certain biomolecules, the binding constants of the analyte to the binding ligand will be at least about 10−4 to 10−9 M−1, with at least about 10−5 to 10−9 being preferred and at least about 10−7 to 10−9 M−1 being particularly preferred.
- As will be appreciated by those in the art, the composition of the binding ligand will depend on the composition of the target analyte. Binding ligands to a wide variety of analytes are known or can be readily found using known techniques. For example, when the analyte is a single-stranded nucleic acid, the binding ligand is generally a substantially complementary nucleic acid. Alternatively, as is generally described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,270,163, 5,475,096, 5,567,588, 5,595,877, 5,637,459, 5,683,867, 5,705,337, and related patents, hereby incorporated by reference, nucleic acid “aptamers” can be developed for binding to virtually any target analyte. Similarly the analyte may be a nucleic acid binding protein and the capture binding ligand is either a single-stranded or double-stranded nucleic acid; alternatively, the binding ligand may be a nucleic acid binding protein when the analyte is a single or double-stranded nucleic acid. When the analyte is a protein, the binding ligands include proteins (particularly including antibodies or fragments thereof (FAbs, etc.)), small molecules, or aptamers, described above. Binding ligands can include proteins include peptides. For example, when the analyte is an enzyme, suitable binding ligands include substrates, inhibitors, and other proteins that bind the enzyme, e.g. components of a multi-enzyme (or protein) complex. As will be appreciated by those in the art, any two molecules that will associate, preferably specifically, may be used, either as the analyte or the binding ligand. Suitable analyte/binding ligand pairs include, but are not limited to, antibodies/antigens, receptors/ligand, proteins/nucleic acids; nucleic acids/nucleic acids, enzymes/substrates and/or inhibitors, carbohydrates (including glycoproteins and glycolipids)/lectins, carbohydrates and other binding partners, proteins/proteins; and protein/small molecules. These may be wild-type or derivative sequences. In an embodiment, the binding ligands are portions (particularly the extracellular portions) of cell surface receptors that are known to multimerize, such as the growth hormone receptor, glucose transporters (particularly GLUT4 receptor), transferrin receptor, epidermal growth factor receptor, low density lipoprotein receptor, high density lipoprotein receptor, leptin receptor, interleukin receptors including IL-1, IL-2, IL-3, IL-4, IL-5, IL-6, IL-7, IL-8, IL-9, IL-11, IL-12, IL-13, IL-15 and IL-17 receptors, VEGF receptor, PDGF receptor, EPO receptor, TPO receptor, ciliary neurotrophic factor receptor, prolactin receptor, and T-cell receptors. Similarly, there is a wide body of literature relating to the development of binding partners based on combinatorial chemistry methods.
- In this embodiment, when the binding ligand is a nucleic acid, compositions and techniques are outlined in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,591,578; 5,824,473; 5,705,348; 5,780,234 and 5,770,369; U.S. Ser. Nos. 08/873,598 08/911,589; WO 98/20162; WO98/12430; WO98/57158; WO 00/16089) WO99/57317; WO99/67425; WO00/24941; PCT US00/10903; WO00/38836; WO99/37819; WO99/57319 and PCTUS00/20476; and related materials, all of which are expressly incorporated by reference in their entirety.
- The method of attachment of the capture binding ligands to the attachment linker will generally be done as is known in the art, and will depend on both the composition of the attachment linker and the capture binding ligand. In general, the capture binding ligands are attached to the attachment linker through the use of functional groups on each that can then be used for attachment. Functional groups for attachment can be amino groups, carboxy groups, oxo groups and thiol groups. These functional groups can then be attached, either directly or indirectly through the use of a linker, sometimes depicted herein as “Z”. Linkers are well known in the art; for example, homo- or hetero-bifunctional linkers as are well known (see 1994 Pierce Chemical Company catalog, technical section on cross-linkers, pages 155-200, incorporated herein by reference). Z linkers can include, but are not limited to, alkyl groups (including substituted alkyl groups and alkyl groups containing heteroatom moieties), with short alkyl groups, esters, amide, amine, epoxy groups and ethylene glycol and derivatives being preferred, with propyl, acetylene, and C2 alkene being especially preferred. Z may also be a sulfone group, forming sulfonamide linkages.
- In this way, capture binding ligands comprising proteins, lectins, nucleic acids, small organic molecules, carbohydrates, etc. can be added.
- An embodiment utilizes proteinaceous capture binding ligands. As is known in the art, any number of techniques may be used to attach a proteinaceous capture binding ligand to an attachment linker. A wide variety of techniques are known to add moieties to proteins.
- An embodiment utilizes nucleic acids as the capture binding ligand. While most of the following discussion focuses on nucleic acids, as will be appreciated by those in the art, many of the techniques outlined below apply in a similar manner to non-nucleic acid systems as well, and to systems that rely on attachment to surfaces other than metal electrodes.
- The capture probe nucleic acid is covalently attached to the electrode, via an “attachment linker”, that can be an insulator. By “covalently attached” herein is meant that two moieties are attached by at least one bond, including sigma bonds, pi bonds and coordination bonds.
- Thus, one end of the attachment linker is attached to a nucleic acid (or other binding ligand), and the other end (although as will be appreciated by those in the art, it need not be the exact terminus for either) is attached to the electrode. Thus, any of the structures depicted herein may further comprise a nucleic acid effectively as a terminal group. Thus, the present invention provides compositions comprising nucleic acids covalently attached to electrodes as is generally depicted below in Structure 8:
- In
Structure 8, the hatched marks on the left represent an electrode. X is a conductive oligomer and I is an insulator as defined herein. F1 is a linkage that allows the covalent attachment of the electrode and the insulator, including bonds, atoms or linkers such as is described herein, for example as “A”, defined below. F2 is a linkage that allows the covalent attachment of the insulator to the nucleic acid, and may be a bond, an atom or a linkage as is herein described. F2 may be part of the insulator, part of the nucleic acid, or exogeneous to both, for example, as defined herein for “Z”. - In an embodiment, the capture probe nucleic acid is covalently attached to the electrode via an attachment linker. The covalent attachment of the nucleic acid and the attachment linker may be accomplished in several ways. In an embodiment, the attachment is via attachment to the base of the nucleoside, via attachment to the backbone of the nucleic acid (either the ribose, the phosphate, or to an analogous group of a nucleic acid analog backbone), or via a transition metal ligand, as described below. The techniques outlined below are generally described for naturally occurring nucleic acids, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, similar techniques may be used with nucleic acid analogs, and in some cases with other binding ligands. Similarly, most of the structures herein depict conductive oligomers as the attachment linkers, but insulators such as alkyl chains are preferred in many embodiments.
- In an embodiment, the attachment linker is attached to the base of a nucleoside of the nucleic acid. This may be done in several ways, depending on the linker, as is described below. In one embodiment, the linker is attached to a terminal nucleoside, e.g. either the 3′ or 5′ nucleoside of the nucleic acid. Alternatively, the linker is attached to an internal nucleoside.
- The point of attachment to the base will vary with the base. Generally, attachment at any position is possible. In some embodiments, for example when the probe containing the ETMs may be used for hybridization, it is preferred to attach at positions not involved in hydrogen bonding to the complementary base. Thus, for example, generally attachment is to the 5 or 6 position of pyrimidines such as uridine, cytosine and thymine. For purines such as adenine and guanine, the linkage is preferably via the 8 position. Attachment to non-standard bases is preferably done at the comparable positions.
- In an embodiment, the attachment linker is attached to the ribose of the ribose-phosphate backbone. This may be done in several ways. As is known in the art, nucleosides that are modified at either the 2′ or 3′ position of the ribose with amino groups, sulfur groups, silicone groups, phosphorus groups, or oxo groups can be made (Imazawa et al., J. Org. Chem., 44:2039 (1979); Hobbs et al., J. Org. Chem. 42(4):714 (1977); Verheyden et al., J. Orrg. Chem. 36(2):250 (1971); McGee et al., J. Org. Chem. 61:781-785 (1996); Mikhailopulo et al., Liebigs. Ann. Chem. 513-519 (1993); McGee et al., Nucleosides & Nucleotides 14(6):1329 (1995), all of which are incorporated by reference). These modified nucleosides are then used to add the attachment linkers.
- An embodiment utilizes amino-modified nucleosides. These amino-modified riboses can then be used to form either amide or amine linkages to an insulator. In an embodiment, the amino group is attached directly to the ribose, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, short linkers such as those described herein for “Z” may be present between the amino group and the ribose.
- Thus the present invention provides substrates comprising at least one detection electrode comprising monolayers and capture binding ligands, useful in target analyte detection systems.
- The terms “electron donor moiety”, “electron acceptor moiety”, and “ETMs” (ETMs) or grammatical equivalents herein refers to molecules capable of electron transfer under certain conditions. It is to be understood that electron donor and acceptor capabilities are relative; that is, a molecule which can lose an electron under certain experimental conditions will be able to accept an electron under different experimental conditions. It is to be understood that the number of possible electron donor moieties and electron acceptor moieties is very large, and that one skilled in the art of electron transfer compounds will be able to utilize a number of compounds in the present invention. ETMs can include, but are not limited to, transition metal complexes, organic ETMs, and electrodes.
- In an embodiment, the ETMs are transition metal complexes. Transition metals are those whose atoms have a partial or complete d shell of electrons. Suitable transition metals for use in the invention include, but are not limited to, cadmium (Cd), copper (Cu), cobalt (Co), palladium (Pd), zinc (Zn), iron (Fe), ruthenium (Ru), rhodium (Rh), osmium (Os), rhenium (Re), platinium (Pt), scandium (Sc), titanium (Ti), Vanadium (V), chromium (Cr), manganese (Mn), nickel (Ni), Molybdenum (Mo), technetium (Tc), tungsten (W), and iridium (Ir). That is, the first series of transition metals, the platinum metals (Ru, Rh, Pd, Os, Ir and Pt), along with Fe, Re, W, Mo and Tc, are preferred. Particularly preferred are ruthenium, rhenium, osmium, platinium, cobalt and iron.
- L are the co-ligands, that provide the coordination atoms for the binding of the metal ion. As will be appreciated by those in the art, the number and nature of the co-ligands will depend on the coordination number of the metal ion. Mono-, di- or polydentate co-ligands may be used at any position. Thus, for example, when the metal has a coordination number of six, the L from the terminus of the insulator, the L contributed from the nucleic acid, and r, add up to six. Thus, when the metal has a coordination number of six, r may range from zero (when all coordination atoms are provided by the other two ligands) to four, when all the co-ligands are monodentate. Thus generally, r will be from 0 to 8, depending on the coordination number of the metal ion and the choice of the other ligands.
- In one embodiment, the metal ion has a coordination number of six and both the ligand attached to the insulator and the ligand attached to the nucleic acid are at least bidentate; that is, r is preferably zero, one (e.g. the remaining co-ligand is bidentate) or two (two monodentate co-ligands are used).
- As will be appreciated in the art, the co-ligands can be the same or different. Suitable ligands fall into two categories: ligands which use nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur, carbon or phosphorus atoms (depending on the metal ion) as the coordination atoms (generally referred to in the literature as sigma (σ) donors) and organometallic ligands such as metallocene ligands (generally referred to in the literature as pi (π) donors, and depicted herein as Lm). Suitable nitrogen donating ligands are well known in the art and include, but are not limited to, NH2; NHR; NRR′; pyridine; pyrazine; isonicotinamide; imidazole; bipyridine and substituted derivatives of bipyridine; terpyridine and substituted derivatives; phenanthrolines, particularly 1,10-phenanthroline (abbreviated phen) and substituted derivatives of phenanthrolines such as 4,7-dimethylphenanthroline and dipyridol[3,2-a:2′,3′-c]phenazine (abbreviated dppz); dipyridophenazine; 1,4,5,8,9,12-hexaazatriphenylene (abbreviated hat); 9,10-phenanthrenequinone diimine (abbreviated phi); 1,4,5,8-tetraazaphenanthrene (abbreviated tap); 1,4,8,11-tetra-azacyclotetradecane (abbreviated cyclam), EDTA, EGTA and isocyanide. Substituted derivatives, including fused derivatives, may also be used. In some embodiments, porphyrins and substituted derivatives of the porphyrin family may be used. See for example, Comprehensive Coordination Chemistry, Ed. Wilkinson et al., Pergammon Press, 1987, Chapters 13.2 (pp73-98), 21.1 (pp. 813-898) and 21.3 (pp 915-957), all of which are hereby expressly incorporated by reference.
- Suitable sigma donating ligands using carbon, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus are known in the art. For example, suitable sigma carbon donors are found in Cotton and Wilkenson, Advanced Organic Chemistry, 5th Edition, John Wiley & Sons, 1988, hereby incorporated by reference; see page 38, for example. Similarly, suitable oxygen ligands include crown ethers, water and others known in the art. Phosphines and substituted phosphines are also suitable; see page 38 of Cotton and Wilkenson.
- The oxygen, sulfur, phosphorus and nitrogen-donating ligands are attached in such a manner as to allow the heteroatoms to serve as coordination atoms.
- In an embodiment, organometallic ligands are used. In addition to purely organic compounds for use as redox moieties, and various transition metal coordination complexes with σ-bonded organic ligand with donor atoms as heterocyclic or exocyclic substituents, there is available a wide variety of transition metal organometallic compounds with π-bonded organic ligands (see Advanced Inorganic Chemistry, 5th Ed., Cotton & Wilkinson, John Wiley & Sons, 1988, chapter 26; Organometallics, A Concise Introduction, Elschenbroich et al., 2nd Ed., 1992, VCH; and Comprehensive Organometallic Chemistry II, A Review of the Literature 1982-1994, Abel et al. Ed., Vol. 7,
chapters - When one or more of the co-ligands is an organometallic ligand, the ligand is generally attached via one of the carbon atoms of the organometallic ligand, although attachment may be via other atoms for heterocyclic ligands. Preferred organometallic ligands include metallocene ligands, including substituted derivatives and the metalloceneophanes (see page 1174 of Cotton and Wilkenson, supra). For example, derivatives of metallocene ligands such as methylcyclopentadienyl, with multiple methyl groups being preferred, such as pentamethylcyclopentadienyl, can be used to increase the stability of the metallocene. In an embodiment, only one of the two metallocene ligands of a metallocene are derivatized.
- Again, other attachment linkers such as alkyl groups may also be utilized.
- In an embodiment, the ligands used in the invention show altered fluorescent properties depending on the redox state of the chelated metal ion. As described below, this thus serves as an additional mode of detection of electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode.
- In addition, similar methods can be used to attach proteins to the detection electrode; see for example U.S. Pat. No. 5,620,850, hereby incorporated by reference.
- In an embodiment, as is described more fully below, the ligand attached to the nucleic acid is an amino group attached to the 2′ or 3′ position of a ribose of the ribose-phosphate backbone. This ligand may contain a multiplicity of amino groups so as to form a polydentate ligand which binds the metal ion. Other ligands can include cyclopentadiene and phenanthroline.
- In an embodiment, the capture probe nucleic acids (or other binding ligands) are covalently attached to the electrode via an insulator (e.g. the attachment linker is an insulator). The attachment of nucleic acids (and other binding ligands) to insulators such as alkyl groups is well known, and can be done to the base or the backbone, including the ribose or phosphate for backbones containing these moieties, or to alternate backbones for nucleic acid analogs.
- In an embodiment, there may be one or more different capture probe species on the surface. In some embodiments, there may be one type of capture probe, or one type of capture probe extender, as is more fully described below. Alternatively, different capture probes, or one capture probe with a multiplicity of different capture extender probes can be used. Similarly, it may be desirable to use auxillary capture probes that comprise relatively short probe sequences, that can be used to “tack down” components of the system, for example the recruitment linkers, to increase the concentration of ETMs at the surface.
- In an embodiment, a number of capture probes are designed and used for each target sequence. That is, a single electrode pad of the array may have 1 probe to the target analyte, or a plurality of probes to the same target sequence, preferably (but not required to be) non-overlapping. This is particularly preferred for long target sequences. In this embodiment, at least two different capture probes are used, with at least 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 being preferred, and 8 being particularly preferred.
- Generally, where a biochip is used for measurements of protein and nucleic acid biomarkers, the protein biomarkers are measured on a chip separate from that used to measure the nucleic acid biomarkers. For nonlimiting examples of additional platforms and methods useful for measuring nucleic acids, see Publications US 2006/0275782 and US2005/0064469. In various embodiments, biomarkers are measured on the same platform, such as on one chip. In various embodiments, biomarkers are measured using different platforms and/or different experimental runs.
- In an embodiment, the compositions further comprise a solution or soluble binding ligand. Solution binding ligands are similar to capture binding ligands, in that they bind, preferably specifically, to target analytes. The solution binding ligand (generally referred to herein as label probes when the target analytes are nucleic acids) may be the same or different from the capture binding ligand. Generally, the solution binding ligands are not directly attached to the surface. The solution binding ligand either directly comprises a recruitment linker that comprises at least one ETM (FIG. 4A from 60/190,259), or the recruitment linker binds, either directly or indirectly, to the solution binding ligand.
- Thus, “solution binding ligands” or “soluble binding ligands” or “signal carriers” or “label probes” or “label binding ligands” with recruitment linkers comprising covalently attached ETMs are provided. That is, one portion of the label probe or solution binding ligand directly or indirectly binds to the target analyte, and one portion comprises a recruitment linker comprising covalently attached ETMs. In some systems, these may be the same. Similarly, the recruitment linker comprises nucleic acid that will hybridize to detection probes.
- Preferred ETMs comprise metallocenes, particularly ferrocene or ferrocene derivatives (
FIG. 1 ). Preferred ferrocene derivatives can be N6 (FIG. 1D ), QW56 (FIG. 2A ), and QW80 (FIG. 2B ). - In addition to transition metal complexes, other organic electron donors and acceptors may be covalently attached to the nucleic acid for use in the invention. These organic molecules include, but are not limited to, riboflavin, xanthene dyes, azine dyes, acridine orange, N,N′-dimethyl-2,7-diazapyrenium dichloride (DAP2+), methylviologen, ethidium bromide, quinones such as N,N′-dimethylanthra(2,1,9-def:6,5,10-d′e′f′)diisoquinoline dichloride (ADIQ2+); porphyrins ([meso-tetrakis(N-methyl-x-pyridinium)porphyrin tetrachloride], varlamine blue B hydrochloride, Bindschedler's green; 2,6-dichloroindophenol, 2,6-dibromophenolindophenol; Brilliant crest blue (3-amino-9-dimethyl-amino-10-methylphenoxyazine chloride), methylene blue; Nile blue A (aminoaphthodiethylaminophenoxazine sulfate), indigo-5,5′,7,7′-tetrasulfonic acid, indigo-5,5′,7-trisulfonic acid; phenosafranine, indigo-5-monosulfonic acid; safranine T; bis(dimethylglyoximato)-iron(II) chloride; induline scarlet, neutral red, anthracene, coronene, pyrene, 9-phenylanthracene, rubrene, binaphthyl, DPA, phenothiazene, fluoranthene, phenanthrene, chrysene, 1,8-diphenyl-1,3,5,7-octatetracene, naphthalene, acenaphthalene, perylene, TMPD and analogs and substituted derivatives of these compounds.
- In one embodiment, the electron donors and acceptors are redox proteins as are known in the art. However, redox proteins in many embodiments are not preferred.
- The choice of the specific ETMs will be influenced by the type of electron transfer detection used, as is generally outlined below. ETMs can include are metallocenes, with ferrocene or ferrocene derivatives being particularly preferred.
- Without being bound by theory, in some embodiments, electron transfer is facilitated when the ETM is able to penetrate (“snuggle”) into the monolayer to some degree. That is, in general, it appears that hydrophobic ETMs used with hydrophobic SAMs give rise to better (greater) signals than ETMs that are charged or more hydrophilic. Thus, for example, ferrocene in solution can penetrate the monolayers of the examples and give a signal when electroconduits are present, while ferrocyanide in solution gives little or no signal. Thus, in general, hydrophobic ETMs are preferred in some embodiments; however, transition metal complexes, although charged, with one or more hydrophobic ligands, such as Ru and Os complexes, also give rise to good signals. Similarly, electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode is facilitated by the use of linkers or spacers that allow the ETM some flexibility to penetrate into the monolayer; thus the N6 compositions of the invention have a four carbon linker attaching the ETM to the nucleic acid.
- In an embodiment, a plurality of ETMs is used. The use of multiple ETMs provides signal amplification and thus allows more sensitive detection limits. As discussed below, while the use of multiple ETMs on nucleic acids that hybridize to complementary strands can cause decreases in Tms of the hybridization complexes depending on the number, site of attachment and spacing between the multiple ETMs, this is not a factor when the ETMs are on the recruitment linker, since this does not hybridize to a complementary sequence. Accordingly, pluralities of ETMs are preferred, with at least about 2 ETMs per recruitment linker being preferred, and at least about 10 being particularly preferred, and at least about 20 to 50 being especially preferred. In some instances, very large numbers of ETMs (100 to 1000) can be used.
- As will be appreciated by those in the art, the portion of the label probe (or target, in some embodiments) that comprises the ETMs (termed herein a “recruitment linker” or “signal carrier”) can be nucleic acid, or it can be a non-nucleic acid linker that links the first hybridizable portion of the label probe to the ETMs. That is, since this portion of the label probe is not required for hybridization, it need not be nucleic acid, although this may be done for ease of synthesis. In some embodiments, as is more fully outlined below, the recruitment linker may comprise double-stranded portions. Thus, as will be appreciated by those in the art, there are a variety of configurations that can be used. In an embodiment, the recruitment linker is nucleic acid (including analogs), and attachment of the ETMs can be via (1) a base; (2) the backbone, including the ribose, the phosphate, or comparable structures in nucleic acid analogs; (3) nucleoside replacement, described below; or (4) metallocene polymers, as described below. In an embodiment, the recruitment linker is non-nucleic acid, and can be either a metallocene polymer or an alkyl-type polymer (including heteroalkyl, as is more fully described below) containing ETM substitution groups.
- In an embodiment, the recruitment linker is a nucleic acid, and comprises covalently attached ETMs. The ETMs may be attached to nucleosides within the nucleic acid in a variety of positions. Embodiments can include, but are not limited to, (1) attachment to the base of the nucleoside, (2) attachment of the ETM as a base replacement, (3) attachment to the backbone of the nucleic acid, including either to a ribose of the ribose-phosphate backbone or to a phosphate moiety, or to analogous structures in nucleic acid analogs, and (4) attachment via metallocene polymers, with the latter being preferred.
- In addition, as is described below, when the recruitment linker is nucleic acid, it may be desirable to use secondary label probes, that have a first portion that will hybridize to a portion of the primary label probes and a second portion comprising a recruitment linker as is defined herein. This is generally depicted in FIG. 16H of U.S. Ser. No. 60/190,259.
- In an embodiment, the ETM is attached to the base of a nucleoside as is generally outlined above for attachment of the attachment linkers. Attachment can be to an internal nucleoside or a terminal nucleoside.
- The covalent attachment to the base will depend in part on the ETM chosen. Attachment may generally be done to any position of the base. In an embodiment, the ETM is a transition metal complex, and thus attachment of a suitable metal ligand to the base leads to the covalent attachment of the ETM. Alternatively, similar types of linkages may be used for the attachment of organic ETMs, as will be appreciated by those in the art.
- In one embodiment, the C4 attached amino group of cytosine, the C6 attached amino group of adenine, or the C2 attached amino group of guanine may be used as a transition metal ligand.
- Ligands containing aromatic groups can be attached via acetylene linkages as is known in the art (see Comprehensive Organic Synthesis, Trost et al., Ed., Pergamon Press, Chapter 2.4: Coupling Reactions Between sp2 and sp Carbon Centers, Sonogashira, pp521-549, and pp950-953, hereby incorporated by reference).
Structure 9 depicts a representative structure in the presence of the metal ion and any other necessary ligands;Structure 30 depicts uridine, although as for all the structures herein, any other base may also be used. - La is a ligand, which may include nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur or phosphorus donating ligands or organometallic ligands such as metallocene ligands. Suitable La ligands include, but are not limited to, phenanthroline, imidazole, bpy and terpy. Lr and M are as defined above. Again, it will be appreciated by those in the art, that a linker (“Z”) may be included between the nucleoside and the ETM.
- Similarly, as for the attachment linkers, the linkage may be done using a linker, which may utilize an amide linkage (see generally Telser et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 111:7221-7226 (1989); Telser et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 111:7226-7232 (1989), both of which are expressly incorporated by reference). These structures are generally depicted below in Structure 10, which again uses uridine as the base, although as above, the other bases may also be used:
- In this embodiment, L is a ligand as defined above, with Lr and M as defined above as well. Preferably, L is amino, phen, byp and terpy.
- In an embodiment, the ETM attached to a nucleoside is a metallocene; e.g. the L and Lr of Structure 10 are both metallocene ligands, Lm, as described above. Structure 11 depicts an embodiment wherein the metallocene is ferrocene, and the base is uridine, although other bases may be used:
- Preliminary data suggest that Structure 11 may cyclize, with the second acetylene carbon atom attacking the carbonyl oxygen, forming a furan-like structure. Metallocenes can include ferrocene, cobaltocene and osmiumocene.
- In an embodiment, the ETM is attached to a ribose at any position of the ribose-phosphate backbone of the nucleic acid, e.g. either the 5′ or 3′ terminus or any internal nucleoside. Ribose in this case can include ribose analogs. As is known in the art, nucleosides that are modified at either the 2′ or 3′ position of the ribose can be made, with nitrogen, oxygen, sulfur and phosphorus-containing modifications possible. Amino-modified and oxygen-modified ribose is preferred. See generally PCT publication WO 95/15971, incorporated herein by reference. These modification groups may be used as a transition metal ligand, or as a chemically functional moiety for attachment of other transition metal ligands and organometallic ligands, or organic electron donor moieties as will be appreciated by those in the art. In this embodiment, a linker such as depicted herein for “Z” may be used as well. Embodiments can utilize attachment at the 2′ or 3′ position of the ribose, with the 2′ position being preferred.
- In an embodiment, a metallocene serves as the ETM, and is attached via an amide bond as depicted below in Structure 12. The examples outline the synthesis of a compound when the metallocene is ferrocene.
- In an embodiment, amine linkages are used, as is generally depicted in Structure 13.
- Z is a linker, as defined herein, with 1-16 atoms being preferred, and 2-4 atoms being particularly preferred, and t is either one or zero.
- In an embodiment, oxo linkages are used, as is generally depicted in
Structure 14. - In
Structure 14, Z is a linker, as defined herein, and t is either one or zero. Z linkers can include alkyl groups including heteroalkyl groups such as (CH2)n and (CH2CH2O)n, with n from 1 to 10 being preferred, and n=1 to 4 being especially preferred, and n=4 being particularly preferred. - Linkages utilizing other heteroatoms are also possible.
- In an embodiment, an ETM is attached to a phosphate at any position of the ribose-phosphate backbone of the nucleic acid. This may be done in a variety of ways. In one embodiment, phosphodiester bond analogs such as phosphoramide or phosphoramidite linkages may be incorporated into a nucleic acid, where the heteroatom (e.g. nitrogen) serves as a transition metal ligand (see PCT publication WO 95/15971, incorporated by reference). In an embodiment, the composition has the structure shown in
Structure 15. - In
Structure 15, the ETM is attached via a phosphate linkage, generally through the use of a linker, Z. Z linkers can include alkyl groups, including heteroalkyl groups such as (CH2)n, (CH2CH2O)n, with n from 1 to 10 being preferred, and n=1 to 4 being especially preferred, and n=4 being particularly preferred. - When the ETM is attached to the base or the backbone of the nucleoside, it is possible to attach the ETMs via “dendrimer” structures, as is more fully outlined below. Alkyl-based linkers can be used to create multiple branching structures comprising one or more ETMs at the terminus of each branch (although internal ETMs can be used as well). Generally, this is done by creating branch points containing multiple hydroxy groups, which optionally can then be used to add additional branch points. The terminal hydroxy groups can then be used in phosphoramidite reactions to add ETMs, as is generally done below for the nucleoside replacement and metallocene polymer reactions. The branch point can be an internal one or a terminal one, and can be a chemical branch point or a nucleoside branch point.
- In an embodiment, an ETM such as a metallocene is used as a “nucleoside replacement”, serving as an ETM. For example, the distance between the two cyclopentadiene rings of ferrocene is similar to the orthongonal distance between two bases in a double stranded nucleic acid. Other metallocenes in addition to ferrocene may be used, for example, air stable metallocenes such as those containing cobalt or ruthenium. Thus, metallocene moieties may be incorporated into the backbone of a nucleic acid, as is generally depicted in Structure 16 (nucleic acid with a ribose-phosphate backbone) and Structure 38 (peptide nucleic acid backbone). Structures 16 and 17 depict ferrocene, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, other metallocenes may be used as well. In general, air stable metallocenes can include metallocenes utilizing ruthenium and cobalt as the metal.
- In Structure 16, Z is a linker as defined above, with generally short, alkyl groups, including heteroatoms such as oxygen being preferred. Generally, what is important is the length of the linker, such that minimal perturbations of a double stranded nucleic acid is effected, as is more fully described below. Thus, methylene, ethylene, ethylene glycols, propylene and butylene are all preferred, with ethylene and ethylene glycol being particularly preferred. In addition, each Z linker may be the same or different. Structure 16 depicts a ribose-phosphate backbone, although as will be appreciated by those in the art, nucleic acid analogs may also be used, including ribose analogs and phosphate bond analogs.
- In Structure 17, Z groups are as listed above, and again, each Z linker can be the same or different. As above, other nucleic acid analogs may be used as well.
- In addition, although the structures and discussion above depict metallocenes, and particularly ferrocene, this same general idea can be used to add ETMs in addition to metallocenes, as nucleoside replacements or in polymer embodiments, described below. Thus, for example, when the ETM is a transition metal complex other than a metallocene, comprising one, two or three (or more) ligands, the ligands can be functionalized as depicted for the ferrocene to allow the addition of phosphoramidite groups. Complexes comprising at least two ring (for example, aryl and substituted aryl) ligands can include, where each of the ligands comprises functional groups for attachment via phosphoramidite chemistry. As will be appreciated by those in the art, this type of reaction, creating polymers of ETMs either as a portion of the backbone of the nucleic acid or as “side groups” of the nucleic acids, to allow amplification of the signals generated herein, can be done with virtually any ETM that can be functionalized to contain the correct chemical groups.
- Thus, by inserting a metallocene such as ferrocene (or other ETMs) into the backbone of a nucleic acid, nucleic acid analogs are made; that is, the invention provides nucleic acids having a backbone comprising at least one metallocene. This is distinguished from nucleic acids having metallocenes attached to the backbone, e.g. via a ribose, a phosphate, etc. That is, two nucleic acids each made up of a traditional nucleic acid or analog (nucleic acids in this case including a single nucleoside), may be covalently attached to each other via a metallocene. Viewed differently, a metallocene derivative or substituted metallocene is provided, wherein each of the two aromatic rings of the metallocene has a nucleic acid substitutent group.
- In addition, as is more fully outlined below, it is possible to incorporate more than one metallocene into the backbone, either with nucleotides in between and/or with adjacent metallocenes. When adjacent metallocenes are added to the backbone, this is similar to the process described below as “metallocene polymers”; that is, there are areas of metallocene polymers within the backbone.
- In addition to the nucleic acid substituent groups, it is also desirable in some instances to add additional substituent groups to one or both of the aromatic rings of the metallocene (or ETM). For example, as these nucleoside replacements are generally part of probe sequences to be hybridized with a substantially complementary nucleic acid, for example a target sequence or another probe sequence, it is possible to add substitutent groups to the metallocene rings to facilitate hydrogen bonding to the base or bases on the opposite strand. These may be added to any position on the metallocene rings. Suitable substitutent groups include, but are not limited to, amide groups, amine groups, carboxylic acids, and alcohols, including substituted alcohols. In addition, these substitutent groups can be attached via linkers as well, although in general this is not preferred.
- In addition, substituent groups on an ETM, particularly metallocenes such as ferrocene, may be added to alter the redox properties of the ETM. Thus, for example, in some embodiments, as is more fully described below, it may be desirable to have different ETMs attached in different ways (e.g. base or ribose attachment), on different probes, or for different purposes (for example, calibration or as an internal standard). Thus, the addition of substituent groups on the metallocene may allow two different ETMs to be distinguished.
- In order to generate these metallocene-backbone nucleic acid analogs, the intermediate components are also provided. Thus, In an embodiment, the invention provides phosphoramidite metallocenes, as generally depicted in Structure 18:
- In Structure 18, PG is a protecting group, generally suitable for use in nucleic acid synthesis, with DMT, MMT and TMT all being preferred. The aromatic rings can either be the rings of the metallocene, or aromatic rings of ligands for transition metal complexes or other organic ETMs. The aromatic rings may be the same or different, and may be substituted as discussed herein.
- Structure 19 depicts the ferrocene derivative:
- These phosphoramidite analogs can be added to standard oligonucleotide syntheses as is known in the art.
- Structure 20 depicts the ferrocene peptide nucleic acid (PNA) monomer, that can be added to PNA synthesis as is known in the art:
- In
Structure 20, the PG protecting group is suitable for use in peptide nucleic acid synthesis, with MMT, boc and Fmoc being preferred. - These same intermediate compounds can be used to form ETM or metallocene polymers, which are added to the nucleic acids, rather than as backbone replacements, as is more fully described below.
- In an embodiment, the ETMs are attached as polymers, for example as metallocene polymers, in a “branched” configuration similar to the “branched DNA” embodiments herein and as outlined in U.S. Pat. No. 5,124,246, using modified functionalized nucleotides. The general idea is as follows. A modified phosphoramidite nucleotide is generated that can ultimately contain a free hydroxy group that can be used in the attachment of phosphoramidite ETMs such as metallocenes. This free hydroxy group could be on the base or the backbone, such as the ribose or the phosphate (although as will be appreciated by those in the art, nucleic acid analogs containing other structures can also be used). The modified nucleotide is incorporated into a nucleic acid, and any hydroxy protecting groups are removed, thus leaving the free hydroxyl. Upon the addition of a phosphoramidite ETM such as a metallocene, as described above in structures 18 and 19, ETMs, such as metallocene ETMs, are added. Additional phosphoramidite ETMs such as metallocenes can be added, to form “ETM polymers”, including “metallocene polymers” as depicted herein, particularly for ferrocene. In addition, in some embodiments, it is desirable to increase the solubility of the polymers by adding a “capping” group to the terminal ETM in the polymer, for example a final phosphate group to the metallocene. Other suitable solubility enhancing “capping” groups will be appreciated by those in the art. It should be noted that these solubility enhancing groups can be added to the polymers in other places, including to the ligand rings, for example on the metallocenes as discussed herein
- In an embodiment, (as depicted in the figures of U.S. Ser. No. 09/626,096) the 2′ position of a ribose of a phosphoramidite nucleotide is first functionalized to contain a protected hydroxy group, in this case via an oxo-linkage, although any number of linkers can be used, as is generally described herein for Z linkers. The protected modified nucleotide is then incorporated via standard phosphoramidite chemistry into a growing nucleic acid. The protecting group is removed, and the free hydroxy group is used, again using standard phosphoramidite chemistry to add a phosphoramidite metallocene such as ferrocene. A similar reaction is possible for nucleic acid analogs. For example, using peptide nucleic acids and the metallocene monomer shown in
Structure 20, peptide nucleic acid structures containing metallocene polymers could be generated. - Thus, the present invention provides recruitment linkers of nucleic acids comprising “branches” of metallocene polymers. Embodiments also utilize metallocene polymers from one to about 50 metallocenes in length, with from about 5 to about 20 being preferred and from about 5 to about 10 being especially preferred.
- In addition, when the recruitment linker is nucleic acid, any combination of ETM attachments may be done.
- In an embodiment, the recruitment linker is not nucleic acid, and instead can be any sort of linker or polymer. As will be appreciated by those in the art, generally any linker or polymer that can be modified to contain ETMs can be used. In general, the polymers or linkers should be reasonably soluble and contain suitable functional groups for the addition of ETMs.
- As used herein, a “recruitment polymer” comprises at least two or three subunits, which are covalently attached. At least some portion of the monomeric subunits contains functional groups for the covalent attachment of ETMs. In some embodiments coupling moieties are used to covalently link the subunits with the ETMs. Functional groups for attachment can include amino groups, carboxy groups, oxo groups and thiol groups, with amino groups being particularly preferred. As will be appreciated by those in the art, a wide variety of recruitment polymers are possible.
- Suitable linkers include, but are not limited to, alkyl linkers (including heteroalkyl (including (poly)ethylene glycol-type structures), substituted alkyl, aryalkyl linkers, etc. As above for the polymers, the linkers will comprise one or more functional groups for the attachment of ETMs, which will be done as will be appreciated by those in the art, for example through the use homo- or hetero-bifunctional linkers as are well known (see 1994 Pierce Chemical Company catalog, technical section on cross-linkers, pages 155-200, incorporated herein by reference).
- Suitable recruitment polymers include, but are not limited to, functionalized styrenes, such as amino styrene, functionalized dextrans, and polyamino acids. Polymers can include polyamino acids (both poly-D-amino acids and poly-L-amino acids), such as polylysine, and polymers containing lysine and other amino acids being particularly preferred. Other suitable polyamino acids are polyglutamic acid, polyaspartic acid, co-polymers of lysine and glutamic or aspartic acid, co-polymers of lysine with alanine, tyrosine, phenylalanine, serine, tryptophan, and/or proline.
- In an embodiment, the recruitment linker comprises a metallocene polymer, as is described above.
- The attachment of the recruitment linkers to the first portion of the label probe will depend on the composition of the recruitment linker, as will be appreciated by those in the art. When the recruitment linker is nucleic acid, it is generally formed during the synthesis of the first portion of the label probe, with incorporation of nucleosides containing ETMs as required. Alternatively, the first portion of the label probe and the recruitment linker may be made separately, and then attached. For example, there may be an overlapping section of complementarity, forming a section of double stranded nucleic acid that can then be chemically crosslinked, for example by using psoralen as is known in the art.
- When non-nucleic acid recruitment linkers are used, attachment of the linker/polymer of the recruitment linker will be done generally using standard chemical techniques, such as will be appreciated by those in the art. For example, when alkyl-based linkers are used, attachment can be similar to the attachment of insulators to nucleic acids.
- In addition, it is possible to have recruitment linkers that are mixtures of nucleic acids and non-nucleic acids, either in a linear form (e.g. nucleic acid segments linked together with alkyl linkers) or in branched forms (nucleic acids with alkyl “branches” that may contain ETMs and may be additionally branched).
- In an embodiment, it is the target sequence itself that carries the ETMs, rather than the recruitment linker of a label probe. For example, as is more fully described below, it is possible to enzymatically add triphosphate nucleotides comprising the ETMs of the invention to a growing nucleic acid, for example during a polymerase chain reaction (PCR). As will be recognized by those in the art, while several enzymes have been shown to generally tolerate modified nucleotides, some of the modified nucleotides of the invention, for example the “nucleoside replacement” embodiments and putatively some of the phosphate attachments, may or may not be recognized by the enzymes to allow incorporation into a growing nucleic acid. Therefore, attachments in this embodiment are to the base or ribose of the nucleotide.
- Thus, for example, PCR amplification of a target sequence, as is well known in the art, will result in target sequences comprising ETMs, generally randomly incorporated into the sequence. The system of the invention can then be configured to allow detection using these ETMs, as is generally depicted in FIGS. 16A, 16B and 16D of U.S. Ser. No. 60/190,259.
- Alternatively, it is possible to enzymatically add nucleotides comprising ETMs to the terminus of a nucleic acid, for example a target nucleic acid. In this embodiment, an effective “recruitment linker” is added to the terminus of the target sequence, that can then be used for detection. Thus the invention provides compositions utilizing electrodes comprising monolayers and capture probes, and target sequences that comprise a first portion that is capable of hybridizing to a component of an assay complex, and a second portion that does not hybridize to a component of an assay complex and comprises at least one covalently attached electron transfer moiety. Similarly, methods utilizing these compositions are also provided.
- It is also possible to have ETMs connected to probe sequences, e.g. sequences designed to hybridize to complementary sequences. Thus, ETMs may be added to non-recruitment linkers as well. For example, there may be ETMs added to sections of label probes that do hybridize to components of the assay complex, for example the first portion, or to the target sequence as outlined above. These ETMs may be used for electron transfer detection in some embodiments, or they may not, depending on the location and system. For example, in some embodiments, when for example the target sequence containing randomly incorporated ETMs is hybridized directly to the capture probe, as is depicted in FIG. 16A of U.S. Ser. No. 60/190,259, there may be ETMs in the portion hybridizing to the capture probe.
- Similarly, in some embodiments, when the recruitment linker is nucleic acid, it may be desirable in some instances to have some or all of the recruitment linker be double stranded. In one embodiment, there may be a second recruitment linker, substantially complementary to the first recruitment linker that can hybridize to the first recruitment linker. In an embodiment, the first recruitment linker comprises the covalently attached ETMs. In an alternative embodiment, the second recruitment linker contains the ETMs, and the first recruitment linker does not, and the ETMs are recruited to the surface by hybridization of the second recruitment linker to the first. In yet another embodiment, both the first and second recruitment linkers comprise ETMs. It should be noted, as discussed above, that nucleic acids comprising a large number of ETMs may not hybridize as well, e.g. the Tm may be decreased, depending on the site of attachment and the characteristics of the ETM. Thus, in general, when multiple ETMs are used on hybridizing strands, generally there are less than about 5, with less than about 3 being preferred, or alternatively the ETMs should be spaced sufficiently far apart that the intervening nucleotides can sufficiently hybridize to allow good kinetics.
- In one embodiment, non-covalently attached ETMs may be used. In one embodiment, the ETM is a hybridization indicator. Hybridization indicators serve as ETMs that will preferentially associate with double stranded nucleic acid, usually reversibly, similar to the method of Millan et al., Anal. Chem. 65:2317-2323 (1993); Millan et al., Anal. Chem. 662943-2948 (1994), both of which are hereby expressly incorporated by reference. In this embodiment, increases in the local concentration of ETMs, due to the association of the ETM hybridization indicator with double stranded nucleic acid at the surface, can be monitored using the monolayers comprising insulators. Hybridization indicators include intercalators and minor and/or major groove binding moieties. In an embodiment, intercalators may be used; since intercalation generally only occurs in the presence of double stranded nucleic acid, only in the presence of double stranded nucleic acid will the ETMs concentrate. Intercalating transition metal complex ETMs are known in the art. Similarly, major or minor groove binding moieties, such as methylene blue, may also be used in this embodiment.
- Similarly, the systems of the invention may utilize non-covalently attached ETMs, as is generally described in Napier et al., Bioconj. Chem. 8:906 (1997), hereby expressly incorporated by reference. In this embodiment, changes in the redox state of certain molecules as a result of the presence of DNA (e.g. guanine oxidation by ruthenium complexes) can be detected using SAMs.
- Thus, the present invention provides electrodes comprising monolayers, generally including capture probes, and either target sequences or label probes comprising recruitment linkers containing ETMs. Probes of the present invention are designed to be complementary to a target sequence (either the target sequence of the sample or to other probe sequences, as is described below), such that hybridization of the target sequence and the probes of the present invention occurs. This complementarity need not be perfect; there may be any number of base pair mismatches which will interfere with hybridization between the target sequence and the single stranded nucleic acids of the present invention. However, if the number of mutations is so great that no hybridization can occur under even the least stringent of hybridization conditions, the sequence is not a complementary target sequence. Thus, by “substantially complementary” herein is meant that the probes are sufficiently complementary to the target sequences to hybridize under normal reaction conditions.
- In an embodiment the electrode is initialized prior to the formulation of an assay complex. As used herein, “initialization” and all grammatical equivalents thereof refer to the process of applying an electronic scan to a monolayer-containing cartridge prior to hybridization of an analyte and formation of an assay complex. Electrode initialization (EI) is a step that can be used to promote specific signal, and/or decrease the noise, and/or make the signal more obvious or detectable in a background of noise.
- Without being bound by theory, EI uses an electronic signal to treat a monolayer by preventing non-specific binding of free-floating ETM probes. Without EI, probes that would normally hybridize to a target analyte sometimes diffuse toward the monolayer without hybridizing to the target. This creates non-specific signals and variable signal potentials. In contrast, if EI is utilized by applying, for example, a short voltage scan to a monolayer-containing cartridge post initial wetting, the voltage pulses drives non-specific probes away from the monolayer and prevents significant amounts non-specific signals and current potential variability. The prevention of non-specific signals results in a higher signal to noise ratio observed during the detection steps described herein.
- In an embodiment, EI improves E0 stability. In this EI context, “E0” refers to the redox potential, which refers to the voltage which must be applied to an electrode (relative to a standard reference electrode such as a normal hydrogen electrode) such that the ratio of oxidized and reduced ETMs is one in the solution near the electrode. An improved E0 stability results in a lower E0 that is shifted less from an expected E0 range relative to samples tested without EI. E0 shifting, e.g., can result from variations in the reference electrode, which occurs when the potential at which an ETM label is shifting, thus resulting in a poor fit of a signal trace. E0 shifting can result in no calls and miscalls as described below.
- In an embodiment, EI improves score shift. As used herein “score shift” refers to a wild-type: mutant signal ratio. Score shifting can occur, for example, when the presence of non-specific labels settle near the surface of an electrodes. Detection of these non-specific labels result in the score being shifted closer to an indeterminate boundary of an assay's calling parameters. Score shifting can result in no calls and miscalls as described below.
- In an embodiment, EI reduces low signal miscalls. Low signal miscalls can result from a poorly processed sample, which in turn results in a signal that while barely exceeds a signal threshold, the signal is incorrectly fit due to the shape of the signal trace. Score shifting can result in no calls and miscalls as described below.
- During analyte detection, the combined major allele and minor allele current (signal) generated for each electrode is usually evaluated against a pre-established signal threshold. The genotyping score, which is derived from the ratio of different ETM signals for each electrode passing the signal strength threshold parameter, can be evaluated and compared to different boundaries. These boundaries are unique for each polymorphism and can be determined empirically using test performance data. The boundaries define zones for classification of scores for a homozygous major allele, a homozygous minor allele and heterozygote genotypes. There can be two ‘indeterminate’ zones; one between the homozygous major allele and heterozygote boundaries, and a second between the heterozygote and homozygous minor allele boundaries. If the score from an electrode falls in this zone, it cannot be classified as a specific genotype, and is considered a no-call due to “indeterminate score.” An indeterminate score can be considered a no call to prevent miscalls, as only robust scores can be used to assign a genotype.
- Without being bound by theory, by combating E0 shifting and non-specific signal, EI promotes a more robust genotype score by eliminating a signal that can be measured with signal strength, evaluated within genotype score logic, and potentially shift an ETM ratio into an indeterminate score zone or into the incorrect ratio zone, resulting in no calls and miscalls.
- EI can be accomplished, for example, by applying an electronic signal prior to running the detection assays as described herein. Briefly, an electronic initialization signal can be applied via at least a sample electrode (containing the complexes of the invention) and a counter electrode to initiate electron transfer between an electrode and non-specific probes.
- In an embodiment, the electronic initialization signal can comprise at least an AC component. In an embodiment, the AC frequency is varied. In an embodiment, multiple frequencies of AC voltage are applied. In an embodiment, several frequencies with a large AC voltage can be applied. The AC frequency can range from 90-1000 Hz. The AC voltage can range from −150 to 880 mV rms. EI can be completed in 0.5 seconds, 2 seconds, 5 seconds, 10 seconds, or longer than 10 seconds.
- In an embodiment, combinations of AC and DC signals, such as AC/CD offset described below, can be used for EI. Thus, the invention can provide voltage sources capable of delivering both AC and DC currents.
- In an embodiment, a plurality of electronic initialization signals is applied. As outlined herein, this may take a variety of forms, including using multiple frequencies, multiple DC offset voltages at a single or two or more frequencies, or multiple AC amplitudes, or combinations of any or all of these.
- A skilled artisan will appreciate that a variety of electronic initialization signals, many of which are described in detail herein, can be used that function to drive non-specific probes away from a monolayer and prevent non-specific detectable signals.
- In general, for all the systems outlined herein, both for nucleic acids and other target analytes, the invention provides assay complexes that minimally comprise a target analyte and a capture binding ligand. For nucleic acid target sequences, by “assay complex” herein is meant the collection of hybridization complexes comprising nucleic acids, including probes and targets that contains at least one label (preferably an ETM in the electronic methods of the present invention) and thus allows detection. The composition of the assay complex depends on the use of the different probe components outlined herein. The assay complexes may also include label probes, capture extender probes, label extender probes, and amplifier probes, as outlined herein and in U.S. Ser. No. 09/626,096, depending on the configuration used.
- The assays are generally run under stringency conditions which allow formation of the label probe hybridization complex only in the presence of target. Stringency can be controlled by altering a step parameter that is a thermodynamic variable, including, but not limited to, temperature, formamide concentration, salt concentration, chaotropic salt concentration pH, organic solvent concentration, etc.
- These parameters may also be used to control non-specific binding, as is generally outlined in U.S. Pat. No. 5,681,697. Thus it may be desirable to perform certain steps at higher stringency conditions; for example, when an initial hybridization step is done between the target sequence and the label extender and capture extender probes. Running this step at conditions which favor specific binding can allow the reduction of non-specific binding.
- The reactions outlined herein may be accomplished in a variety of ways, as will be appreciated by those in the art. Components of the reaction may be added simultaneously, or sequentially, in any order, with embodiments outlined below. In addition, the reaction may include a variety of other reagents. These include reagents like salts, buffers, neutral proteins (e.g. albumin), detergents, etc which may be used to facilitate optimal hybridization and detection, and/or reduce non-specific or background interactions. Also reagents that otherwise improve the efficiency of the assay, such as protease inhibitors, nuclease inhibitors, anti-microbial agents, etc., may be used, depending on the sample preparation methods and purity of the target.
- Detection of electron transfer, e.g. the presence of the ETMs, is generally initiated electronically, with voltage being preferred. A potential is applied to the assay complex. Precise control and variations in the applied potential can be via a potentiostat and either a three electrode system (one reference, one sample (or working) and one counter electrode) or a two electrode system (one sample and one counter electrode). This allows matching of applied potential to peak potential of the system which depends in part on the choice of ETMs and in part on the other system components, the composition and integrity of the monolayer, and what type of reference electrode is used. As described herein, ferrocene is an ETM.
- In some embodiments, co-reductants or co-oxidants are used as is generally described in WO00/16089, hereby expressly incorporated by reference.
- The presence of the ETMs at the surface of the monolayer can be detected in a variety of ways. A variety of detection methods may be used, including, but not limited to, optical detection (as a result of spectral changes upon changes in redox states), which includes fluorescence, phosphorescence, luminiscence, chemiluminescence, electrochemiluminescence, and refractive index; and electronic detection, including, but not limited to, amperommetry, voltammetry, capacitance and impedence. These methods include time or frequency dependent methods based on AC or DC currents, pulsed methods, lock-in techniques, filtering (high pass, low pass, band pass), and time-resolved techniques including time-resolved fluoroscence.
- In one embodiment, the efficient transfer of electrons from the ETM to the electrode results in stereotyped changes in the redox state of the ETM. With many ETMs including the complexes of ruthenium containing bipyridine, pyridine, and imidazole rings, these changes in redox state are associated with changes in spectral properties. Significant differences in absorbance are observed between reduced and oxidized states for these molecules. See for example Fabbrizzi et al., Chem. Soc. Rev. 1995 pp197-202). Such differences can be monitored using a spectrophotometer or simple photomultiplier tube device.
- In this embodiment, possible electron donors and acceptors include all the derivatives listed above for photoactivation or initiation. Electron donors and acceptors have characteristically large spectral changes upon oxidation and reduction resulting in highly sensitive monitoring of electron transfer. Such examples include Ru(NH3)4py and Ru(bpy)2im as preferred examples. It should be understood that only the donor or acceptor that is being monitored by absorbance need have ideal spectral characteristics.
- In an embodiment, the electron transfer is detected fluorometrically. Numerous transition metal complexes, including those of ruthenium, have distinct fluorescence properties. Therefore, the change in redox state of the electron donors and electron acceptors attached to the nucleic acid can be monitored very sensitively using fluorescence, for example with Ru(4,7-biphenyl2-phenanthroline)3 2+. The production of this compound can be easily measured using standard fluorescence assay techniques. For example, laser induced fluorescence can be recorded in a standard single cell fluorimeter, a flow through “on-line” fluorimeter (such as those attached to a chromatography system) or a multi-sample “plate-reader” similar to those marketed for 96-well immuno assays.
- Alternatively, fluorescence can be measured using fiber optic sensors with nucleic acid probes in solution or attached to the fiber optic. Fluorescence is monitored using a photomultiplier tube or other light detection instrument attached to the fiber optic. The advantage of this system is the extremely small volumes of sample that can be assayed.
- In addition, scanning fluorescence detectors such as the Fluorlmager sold by Molecular Dynamics are ideally suited to monitoring the fluorescence of modified nucleic acid molecules arrayed on solid surfaces. The advantage of this system is the large number of electron transfer probes that can be scanned at once using chips covered with thousands of distinct nucleic acid probes.
- Many transition metal complexes display fluorescence with large Stokes shifts. Suitable examples include bis- and trisphenanthroline complexes and bis- and trisbipyridyl complexes of transition metals such as ruthenium (see Juris, A., Balzani, V., et. al. Coord. Chem. Rev., V. 84, p. 85-277, 1988). Examples display efficient fluorescence (reasonably high quantum yields) as well as low reorganization energies. These include Ru(4,7-biphenyl2-phenanthroline)3 2+, Ru(4,4′-diphenyl-2,2′-bipyridine)3 2+ and platinum complexes (see Cummings et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc. 118:1949-1960 (1996), incorporated by reference). Alternatively, a reduction in fluorescence associated with hybridization can be measured using these systems.
- In a further embodiment, electrochemiluminescence is used as the basis of the electron transfer detection. With some ETMs such as Ru2+(bpy)3, direct luminescence accompanies excited state decay. Changes in this property are associated with nucleic acid hybridization and can be monitored with a simple photomultiplier tube arrangement (see Blackburn, G. F. Clin. Chem. 37: 1534-1539 (1991); and Juris et al., supra.
- In an embodiment, electronic detection is used, including amperommetry, voltammetry, capacitance, and impedence. Suitable techniques include, but are not limited to, electrogravimetry; coulometry (including controlled potential coulometry and constant current coulometry); voltammetry (cyclic voltammetry, pulse voltammetry (normal pulse voltammetry, square wave voltammetry, differential pulse voltammetry, Osteryoung square wave voltammetry, and coulostatic pulse techniques); stripping analysis (aniodic stripping analysis, cathiodic stripping analysis, square wave stripping voltammetry); conductance measurements (electrolytic conductance, direct analysis); time-dependent electrochemical analyses (chronoamperometry, chronopotentiometry, cyclic chronopotentiometry and amperometry, AC polography, chronogalvametry, and chronocoulometry); AC impedance measurement; capacitance measurement; AC voltammetry; and photoelectrochemistry.
- In an embodiment, monitoring electron transfer is via amperometric detection. This method of detection involves applying a potential (as compared to a separate reference electrode) between the nucleic acid-conjugated electrode and a reference (counter) electrode in the sample containing target genes of interest. Electron transfer of differing efficiencies is induced in samples in the presence or absence of target nucleic acid; that is, the presence or absence of the target nucleic acid, and thus the label probe, can result in different currents.
- The device for measuring electron transfer amperometrically involves sensitive current detection and includes a means of controlling the voltage potential, usually a potentiostat. This voltage is optimized with reference to the potential of the electron donating complex on the label probe. Possible electron donating complexes include those previously mentioned with complexes of iron, osmium, platinum, cobalt, rhenium and ruthenium being preferred and complexes of iron being most preferred.
- In an embodiment, alternative electron detection modes are utilized. For example, potentiometric (or voltammetric) measurements involve non-faradaic (no net current flow) processes and are utilized traditionally in pH and other ion detectors. Similar sensors are used to monitor electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode. In addition, other properties of insulators and of conductors (such as resistance conductivity, impedance and capicitance) could be used to monitor electron transfer between ETM and the electrode. Finally, any system that generates a current (such as electron transfer) also generates a small magnetic field, which may be monitored in some embodiments.
- It should be understood that one benefit of the fast rates of electron transfer observed in the compositions of the invention is that time resolution can greatly enhance the signal-to-noise results of monitors based on absorbance, fluorescence and electronic current. The fast rates of electron transfer of the present invention result both in high signals and stereotyped delays between electron transfer initiation and completion. By amplifying signals of particular delays, such as through the use of pulsed initiation of electron transfer and “lock-in” amplifiers of detection, and Fourier transforms.
- In an embodiment, electron transfer is initiated using alternating current (AC) methods. Without being bound by theory, it appears that ETMs, bound to an electrode, generally respond similarly to an AC voltage across a circuit containing resistors and capacitors.
- There are a variety of techniques that can be used to increase the signal, decrease the noise, or make the signal more obvious or detectable in a background of noise in addition to the electrode initialization steps described herein. That is, any technique that can serve to better identify a signal in the background noise may find use in the present invention. These techniques are generally classified in three ways: (1) variations in the type or methods of applying the initiation signals (e.g. varying the “input” to maximize or identify the sample signal); (2) data processing, e.g. techniques used on the “output” signals to maximize or identify the sample signal; and (3) variations in the assay itself, e.g. to the electrode surface or to the components of the system, that allow for better identification of the sample signal. Thus, for example, suitable “input” AC methods include, but are not limited to, using multiple frequencies; increasing the AC amplitude; the use of square wave ACV; the use of special or complicated waveforms; etc. Similarly, suitable “output” AC techniques include, but are not limited to, monitoring higher harmonic frequencies; phase analysis or filters; background subtraction techniques (including but not limited to impedance analysis and the use of signal recognition or peak recognition techniques); digital filtering techniques; bandwidth narrowing techniques (including lock-in detection schemes particularly digital lock in); Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) methods; correlation and/or convolution techniques; signal averaging; spectral analysis; etc. Additionally, varying components of the assay can be done to result in the sample signal and the noise signal being altered in a non-parallel fashion; that is, the two signals respond non-linearly with respect to each other. These techniques are described in WO00/16089 and O'Connor et al., J. Electroanal. Chem. 466(2):197-202 (1999), hereby expressly incorporated by reference.
- In general, non-specifically bound label probes/ETMs show differences in impedance (e.g. higher impedances) than when the label probes containing the ETMs are specifically bound in the correct orientation. In an embodiment, the non-specifically bound material is washed away, resulting in an effective impedance of infinity. Thus, AC detection gives several advantages as is generally discussed below, including an increase in sensitivity, and the ability to “filter out” background noise. In particular, changes in impedance (including, for example, bulk impedance) as between non-specific binding of ETM-containing probes and target-specific assay complex formation may be monitored.
- Accordingly, when using AC initiation and detection methods, the frequency response of the system changes as a result of the presence of the ETM. By “frequency response” herein is meant a modification of signals as a result of electron transfer between the electrode and the ETM. This modification is different depending on signal frequency. A frequency response includes AC currents at one or more frequencies, phase shifts, DC offset voltages, faradaic impedance, etc.
- Input Signal
- Once the assay complex including the target sequence and label probe is made, a first input electrical signal is then applied to the system, preferably via at least the sample electrode (containing the complexes of the invention) and the counter electrode, to initiate electron transfer between the electrode and the ETM. Three electrode systems may also be used, with the voltage applied to the reference and working electrodes. The first input signal comprises at least an AC component. The AC component may be of variable amplitude and frequency. Generally, for use in the present methods, the AC amplitude ranges from about 1 mV to about 1.1 V, with from about 10 mV to about 800 mV being preferred, and from about 10 mV to about 500 mV being especially preferred. The AC frequency ranges from about 0.01 Hz to about 100 MHz, with from about 10 Hz to about 10 MHz being preferred, and from about 100 Hz to about 20 MHz being especially preferred.
- The use of combinations of AC and DC signals gives a variety of advantages, including surprising sensitivity and signal maximization.
- In an embodiment, the first input signal comprises a DC component and an AC component, which is known at AC/DC offset. That is, a DC offset voltage between the working and counter electrodes is swept through the electrochemical potential of the ETM (for example, when ferrocene is used, the sweep is generally from 0 to 500 mV) (or alternatively, the working Electrode is grounded and the counter electrode is swept from 0 to −500 mV). The sweep is used to identify the DC voltage at which the maximum response of the system is seen. This is generally at or about the electrochemical potential of the ETM. Once this voltage is determined, either a sweep or one or more uniform DC offset voltages may be used. DC offset voltages of from about −1 V to about +1.1 V are preferred, with from about −500 mV to about +800 mV being especially preferred, and from about −300 mV to about 500 mV being particularly preferred. In an embodiment, the DC offset voltage is not zero. On top of the DC offset voltage, an AC signal component of variable amplitude and frequency is applied. If the ETM is present, and can respond to the AC perturbation, an AC current will be produced due to electron transfer between the electrode and the ETM. These voltages are meaningful numbers for a Ag vs an AgCl reference electrode.
- Thus, the devices of the invention preferably provide voltage sources capable of delivering both AC and DC currents.
- For defined systems, it may be sufficient to apply a single input signal to differentiate between the presence and absence of the ETM (e.g. the presence of the target sequence) nucleic acid. Alternatively, a plurality of input signals is applied. As outlined herein, this may take a variety of forms, including using multiple frequencies, multiple DC offset voltages, or multiple AC amplitudes, or combinations of any or all of these.
- Thus, In an embodiment, multiple DC offset voltages are used, although as outlined above, DC voltage sweeps are preferred. This may be done at a single frequency, or at two or more frequencies.
- In an embodiment, the AC frequency is varied. At different frequencies, different molecules respond in different ways. As will be appreciated by those in the art, increasing the frequency generally increases the output current. However, when the frequency is greater than the rate at which electrons may travel between the electrode and the ETM, higher frequencies result in a loss or decrease of output signal. At some point, the frequency will be greater than the rate of electron transfer between the ETM and the electrode, and then the output signal will also drop.
- In an embodiment, multiple frequencies with a small AC voltage are applied and the fundamental of each is evaluated. Alternatively, an embodiment utilizes several frequencies with a large AC voltage, and the harmonics of each are evaluated. Similarly, embodiments utilize several frequencies with a large AC voltage where the effect of the different frequencies on the system can result in an output that is different from the sum of the outputs at individual frequencies.
- In one embodiment, detection utilizes a single measurement of output signal at a single frequency. That is, the frequency response of the system in the absence of target sequence, and thus the absence of label probe containing ETMs, can be previously determined to be very low at a particular high frequency. Using this information, any response at a particular frequency, will show the presence of the assay complex. That is, any response at a particular frequency is characteristic of the assay complex. Thus, it may only be necessary to use a single input frequency, and any changes in frequency response is an indication that the ETM is present, and thus that the target sequence is present.
- In an embodiment, the input signals and data processing steps are done to increase the non-linearity of the system. That is, for example, the ferrocene response reacts non-linearly, producing a harmonic response in the signal above that in the background; this harmonic signal from AC voltammetry is most likely the result of a harmonic distortion due to the nonlinear response of the electrochemical cell; see Yap, J. of Electroanalytical Chem. 454:33 (1998); hereby incorporated by reference. Thus, any techniques that increase this non-linearity are desirable. In an embodiment, techniques are used to increase the higher harmonic signals; thus, frequency and phase-sensitive lock-in detection is performed at both the fundamental frequency of the applied waveform and also at multiples of the fundamental frequency (e.g. the higher harmonics) or just one. Since the background capacitance responds relatively linearly to AC signals (a sine wave input AC voltage results in a relatively nondistorted sine wave output), very little upper harmonic current is produced in the background. This gives a dramatic increase in the signal to noise ratio. Thus, detection at the higher harmonic frequencies, particularly the third, fourth and fifth harmonics (although the harmonics from second to tenth or greater can also be used) is shown to result in dramatic suppression of the background currents associated with non-Faradaic processes (like double layer charging) that can overwhelm the signal from the target molecules. In this way, the evaluation of the system at higher harmonic frequencies and phases can lead to significant improvements in the detection limits and clarity of signal. However, in some embodiments, the analysis of higher harmonics is not desired.
- Thus, In an embodiment, one method of increasing the non-linear harmonic response is to increase or vary the amplitude of the AC perturbation, although this may also be used in monitoring the fundamental frequency as well. Without being bound by theory, it appears that increasing the amplitude increases the driving force nonlinearly. Thus, generally, the same system gives an improved response (e.g. higher output signals) at any single frequency through the use of higher overpotentials at that frequency. Thus, the amplitude may be increased at high frequencies to increase the rate of electron transfer through the system, resulting in greater sensitivity. In addition, this may be used, for example, to induce responses in slower systems such as those that do not possess optimal spacing configurations.
- In an embodiment, measurements of the system are taken at least two separate amplitudes or overpotentials, with measurements at a plurality of amplitudes being preferred. As noted above, changes in response as a result of changes in amplitude may form the basis of identification, calibration and quantification of the system. In addition, one or more AC frequencies can be used as well.
- In an embodiment, harmonic square wave AC voltage is used; see Baranski et al., J. Electroanal. Chem. 373:157 (1994), incorporated herein by reference, although in some embodiments this is not preferred. This gives several potential advantages. For example, square waves are easier to create digitally and the pulse shape of the square wave can allow for better discrimination against charging capacitance. In sinusoidal harmonic AC voltammetry, harmonic signals provide better signal to background since faradaic response can be more nonlinear than charging capacitance. The same concept applies to SW harmonic AC voltage. The key difference between the two techniques is the frequency spectrum of the AC waveform. A singular frequency sinusoidal waveform contains just the fundamental frequency whereas a singular square wave contains the fundamental frequency as well as all odd harmonics. The technique looks at the even harmonics where the ratio of faradaic current to capacitance current is enhanced. All the odd harmonics have single AC voltage peaks while all the even harmonics have double AC voltage peaks. This is opposite to the case of sinusoidal harmonic AC voltage of a system that has a non-reversible redox couple.
- In an embodiment, multiple frequency AC voltage is used. The idea is to create a waveform consisting of multiple frequencies with the same amplitude or different amplitudes to excite an electrochemical cell in an AC voltage fashion. The method benefits from fast Fourier transform or joint time-frequency transform to analyze the cell response. A JTFT spectrogram of a multiple frequencies AC voltage provides information on the driven (or fundamental) frequencies as well as their harmonic components. Some possible data analyses are: 1) comparison of response of fundamental frequencies, 2) comparison of all harmonic frequencies, 3) comparison of the response of one particular harmonic frequency of all excited frequencies, and 4) all analyses possible by standard single frequency AC voltage.
- Accordingly, In an embodiment, a fast Fourier transform is done, as is generally outlined in the examples. Fourier transform analysis is a method for improving signal to noise and isolating desired signals when sinusoidal electrochemistry is done. Typical AC techniques rely on measurements of the primary frequency only. With sinusoidal voltammetry (and other inputs) observation at higher harmonics allows discrimination of signals primarily based on kinetics. For example, both fast and slow redox events would give similar peaks (provided the AC frequency was not too high) at the primary frequency. However, at higher harmonics, some redox molecules would generate signals while others would not. Using FFT analysis, all the various frequency components of a response to a sinusoidal input can be observed at once.
- Similarly, in an embodiment, a joint time-frequency transform (JTFT) is done.
- In an embodiment, digital lock-in techniques are used. In the past, digitized raw data from the electrochemical cell have been analyzed by either fast Fourier transform or some complex form of joint time-frequency transform analysis. The major drawback of these methods is the enormous computational time associated with frequency transformation techniques. Digital lock-in, on the other hand, is simple and fast. In principle, digital lock-in is identical to analog lock-in. In the former case, the bandwidth narrowing process is done mathematically by multiplying the cell response by a sinusoidal with the same frequency as the input voltage, but with 90— phase shift. The technique has the same limitation as its analog counterpart since only one frequency can be analyzed at a time. However, unlike analog lock-in, other frequencies can also be analyzed sequentially (or in parallel with a more powerful processor) since the raw data is archived. For an input voltage of
-
V in =E dc +rt+E ac Sin(ωt) (1) - the cell's response is essentially
-
- To find the voltage dependent coefficients L for the frequency (n0 w) we multiply the response by 2 Sin(_n0 t) and −2 Cos(_n0 t) and apply a low pass filter to get the real and imaginary components. The low pass filtering used in this example is a simple moving average. Mathematically, the process is expressed as
-
- In an embodiment, background subtraction of the current vector and phase optimization is done.
- In an embodiment, correlation and/or convolution techniques are used. In this embodiment, many scans of the same electrode. Rather than looking for a peak in a single scan, many scans are viewed and a common correlation between the scans. For instance, it is possible that a bump in the noise appears near 180 mV for a negative, even if no ferrocene is present. However, it is unlikely that the same bump will appear in the same place if the frequencies are scanned. Thus, embodiments take scans at many frequencies and only count a positive if a peak occurs in all of them. This is a very simple correlation; more complex correlations may be done as well.
- In an embodiment, signal recovery is done using signal recognition and background subtraction. In this embodiment, the idea is to fit the cell response to two summed functions, one that describes the signal and the other that models the background capacitive current. Once the functions are constructed, the signal is easily recovered from the response by subtracting the fitted background capacitive current. This signal recognition scheme is applicable to any system where the signal has a behavior and shape that is relatively well known.
- The response from an electrochemical cell can be processed with a lock-in amplifier or equivalent bandwidth-narrowing technique. This is one of many methods of increasing signal to background using some form of bandwidth-narrowing technique.
- In an embodiment, spectral analysis of the signal is done. In this embodiment, filtering techniques in the frequency domain make use of means, variances, densities, autocorrelation functions, and power spectral densities of the signal and apply it to the present systems to enhance the signal to noise ratio (see Schwartz et al., Signal Processing: Discrete Spectral Analysis, Detection, and Estimation, N.Y. McGraw Hill, 1975, hereby incorporated by reference).
- In an embodiment, digital filtering techniques are used. These include, but are not limited to, match filter, Weiner filtering, Kalman, Finite Impulse Response, infinite impulse response, narrow band filtering, etc.
- In an embodiment, a match filter is used; see Ziemer et al., “Principles of Communication Systems, Modulation and Noise”, 4th Ed. John Wiley & Sons Inc., New York, 465-471, 1988; and Helstrom, C. W., “Statistical Theory of Signal Detection”, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 112-115, 1968, both of which are incorporated by reference. In its simplest form, a match filter is a signal processing technique that “weights” the measured response (signal plus noise) samples by some corresponding known signal amplitude and convolutes the two signals to enhance signal to noise.
- In an embodiment, a Weiner filter is used (see Press, supra; and Elliot et al., Fast Transforms: Algorithm, Analysis, Applications N.Y. Academic Press (1982), both of which are incorporated by reference). Weiner filtering involves finding an optimal filter that removes noise or background from the “corrupted” signal. This signal processing method works in conjunction with Fourier transform techniques. The idea is as follows. Due to poor signal to noise or a large background, the output from the instrument is a “corrupted” signal
-
c(t)=s(t)+n(t) - where s(t) is the signal and n(t) is the noise. Note that s(t) is not the desired signal, it is composed of the true uncorrupted signal u(t) convolved with some known response function r(t) (In the case of the CMS system with a redox couple, u(t) is the Nernstian). In other words,
-
s(t)=∫−∞ ∞ r(t−τ)u(τ)dτ. - In frequency space, the relation is
-
S(ω)=R(ω)U(ω), - where S, R, and U are the Fourier transform of s, r, and u, respectively. The uncorrupted signal can be recovered by finding the optimal filter φ(t) or its Fourier counterpart Φ(ω) which when applied to the measured signal c(t) or C(ω), and then deconvolved by r(t) or R(ω), produces a signal that approximates the uncorrupted signal u(t) or U(ω) with
-
- In general the optimal filter is defined as
-
- In an embodiment, a Kalman filter is used, which is a recursive-estimation filtering technique that tracks the current value of a changing signal in the presence of noise. See Kalman et al., A New Approach to Linear Filtering and Prediction Problems, Trans. ASME J. Basic Engineering, Series D, 82, Mar. 35, 1960; Elliot Ed. Handbook of Digital Signal Processing: Engineering Applications, “Academic Press, San Diego, p908, 1987; Chui et al., Kalman Filtering: with Real Time Applications”, Springer-Verlag, New York, 1987; all of which are expressly incorporated by reference.
- In an embodiment, the non-linear harmonic response is increased by inducing an asymmetrical response. In an embodiment, this is done by using a system that has a non-reversible redox couple. For example, ferrocene is a redox couple that is very reversible. Thus, the ferrocenes subtended by the ac voltage at a given point, get oxidized on the upswing of the ac voltage and reduced on the down swing. However, if a semi-reversible or non-reversible redox couple is used, for example, the molecule will get oxidized on the upswing and not reduced (or a portion) on the downswing; or vice versa. This will produce even greater non-linearities at certain frequencies.
- Three examples of ways to perform this are: use an ETM molecule that gets degraded in the oxidized form, like luminol, use co-reduction or redox mediation, and use enzyme coupled mediation, as generally described in WO00/16089.
- In an embodiment, electron transfer is initiated using alternating current (AC) methods. In addition, the use of AC techniques allows the significant reduction of background signals at any single frequency due to entities other than the ETMs, e.g. “locking out” or “filtering” unwanted signals. That is, the frequency response of a charge carrier or redox active molecule in solution will be limited by its diffusion coefficient and charge transfer coefficient. Accordingly, at high frequencies, a charge carrier may not diffuse rapidly enough to transfer its charge to the electrode, and/or the charge transfer kinetics may not be fast enough. This is particularly significant in embodiments that do not have good monolayers, e.g. have partial or insufficient monolayers, e.g. where the solvent is accessible to the electrode. As outlined above, in DC techniques, the presence of “holes” where the electrode is accessible to the solvent can result in solvent charge carriers “short circuiting” the system, e.g. they reach the electrode and generate background signal. However, using the present AC techniques, one or more frequencies can be chosen that prevent a frequency response of one or more charge carriers in solution, whether or not a monolayer is present. This is particularly significant since many biological fluids such as blood contain significant amounts of redox active molecules which can interfere with amperometric detection methods.
- In an embodiment, measurements of the system are taken at least two separate frequencies, with measurements at a plurality of frequencies being preferred. A plurality of frequencies includes a scan. For example, measuring the output signal, e.g., the AC current, at a low input frequency such as 1-20 Hz, and comparing the response to the output signal at high frequency such as 10-100 kHz will show a frequency response difference between the presence and absence of the ETM. In an embodiment, the frequency response is determined at at least two, preferably at least about five, and more preferably at least about ten frequencies.
- Output Signal
- After transmitting the input signal to initiate electron transfer, an output signal is received or detected. The presence and magnitude of the output signal will depend on a number of factors, including the overpotential/amplitude of the input signal; the frequency of the input AC signal; the composition of the intervening medium; the DC offset; the environment of the system; the nature of the ETM; the solvent; and the type and concentration of salt. At a given input signal, the presence and magnitude of the output signal will depend in general on the presence or absence of the ETM, the placement and distance of the ETM from the surface of the monolayer and the character of the input signal. In some embodiments, it may be possible to distinguish between non-specific binding of label probes and the formation of target specific assay complexes containing label probes, on the basis of impedance.
- In an embodiment, the output signal comprises an AC current. As outlined above, the magnitude of the output current will depend on a number of parameters. By varying these parameters, the system may be optimized in a number of ways.
- In general, AC currents generated in the present invention range from about 1 femptoamp to about 1 milliamp, with currents from about 50 femptoamps to about 100 microamps being preferred, and from about 1 picoamp to about 1 microamp being especially preferred.
- In an embodiment, the output signal is phase shifted in the AC component relative to the input signal. Without being bound by theory, it appears that the systems of the present invention may be sufficiently uniform to allow phase-shifting based detection. That is, the complex biomolecules of the invention through which electron transfer occurs react to the AC input in a homogeneous manner, similar to standard electronic components, such that a phase shift can be determined. This may serve as the basis of detection between the presence and absence of the ETM, and/or differences between the presence of target-specific assay complexes comprising label probes and non-specific binding of the label probes to the system components.
- The output signal is characteristic of the presence of the ETM; that is, the output signal is characteristic of the presence of the target-specific assay complex comprising label probes and ETMs. In an embodiment, the basis of the detection is a difference in the faradaic impedance of the system as a result of the formation of the assay complex. Faradaic impedance is the impedance of the system between the electrode and the ETM. Faradaic impedance is quite different from the bulk or dielectric impedance, which is the impedance of the bulk solution between the electrodes. Many factors may change the faradaic impedance which may not affect the bulk impedance, and vice versa. Thus, the assay complexes comprising the nucleic acids in this system have certain faradaic impedance that will depend on the distance between the ETM and the electrode, their electronic properties, and the composition of the intervening medium, among other things. Of importance in the methods of the invention is that the faradaic impedance between the ETM and the electrode is significantly different depending on whether the label probes containing the ETMs are specifically or non-specifically bound to the electrode.
- Accordingly, the present invention further provides electronic devices or apparatus for the detection of analytes using the compositions of the invention. The apparatus includes a test chamber for receiving a sample solution which has at least a first measuring or sample electrode, and a second measuring or counter electrode. Three electrode systems are also useful. The first and second measuring electrodes are in contact with a test sample receiving region, such that in the presence of a liquid test sample, the two electrophoresis electrodes may be in electrical contact.
- In an embodiment, the apparatus also includes detection electrodes comprising a single stranded nucleic acid capture probe covalently attached via an attachment linker, and a monolayer, such as are described herein.
- The apparatus further comprises an AC voltage source electrically connected to the test chamber; that is, to the measuring electrodes. Preferably, the AC voltage source is capable of delivering DC offset voltage as well.
- In an embodiment, the apparatus further comprises a processor capable of comparing the input signal and the output signal. The processor is coupled to the electrodes and configured to receive an output signal, and thus detect the presence of the target nucleic acid.
- The methods and compositions described are further illustrated in the following example, which is provided by way of illustration and is not intended to be limiting.
- Implementation of electrode initialization (EI) was performed to validate that EI resolves the following failure modes: E0 shifting, score shifting, and low signal miscalls. EI treats a self-assembled monolayer (SAM) by combating non-specific binding of free-floating electron transfer moiety (ETM) probes. EI was tested against a standard cystic fibrosis protocol (
FIG. 4 ). The validation study further demonstrated that implementation of EI does not negatively impact the ability of an assay to call wild-type, heterozygous, and mutant genotypes. - An eSensor®CF Genotyping Test was used for determining the genotyping status of a defined panel of CF mutations. Purified genomic DNA was isolated from the patient specimen. The eSensor® Cystic Fibrosis Genotyping Test generated single stranded target DNA from the genomic DNA by multiplex PCR amplification followed by exonuclease digestion. The specimen was combined with a signal buffer containing a pair of allele-specific oligonucleotide signal probes for each polymorphism, where each pair of signal probes was labeled with a genotype-specific ferrocene derivative. The mixture of amplified sample and signal buffer was loaded onto a cartridge containing single stranded oligonucleotide capture probes bound to gold-plated electrodes. The cartridge was inserted into an XT-8 instrument where the single stranded targets hybridized to the complementary sequences of the capture probes and signal probes.
- The ferrocene label was detected at the electrode surface using voltammetry. The resulting current was interpreted by the XT-8 system and reporting software to evaluate signal strength and genotyping score. The combined major allele and minor allele current (signal) generated for each electrode was evaluated against a pre-established signal threshold.
- Upon startup of the XT-8 cartridge, all probes diffused toward the SAM, creating non-specific signal and variable signal potentials. By applying a short scan to the cartridge post initial wetting, the voltage pulses all non-specific probes away from the monolayer and prevents non-specific signal and current potential variability, leaving a specific signal for the detection portion of signal scanning.
- Twenty (20) Coriell and five (5) MMQCI control samples (Table 1) were tested that represent wild-type (RM005172: Control E_CF.WT) and all heterozygous and/or mutant genotypes included in a GenMark CF panel. In addition, three (3) wild-type and three (3) representative heterozygous patient genomic DNA samples (delF508, G542X, and R117H) were tested. One sample previously demonstrated to result in a high level of 1717-1G>A (see Table 3) low signal calls will be tested in quadruplicate. Table 1 summarizes each of the samples used in addition to the mutation(s) that each sample represents.
-
TABLE 1 Samples used for EI Coriell Controls Final Con- Sam- Vendor centration ple ID Genotype (ng/ul) 1 NA12444 1717 − 1G > A; 7T/ 7T 2 2 NA18800 1898 + 1G > A; delF508; 7T/ 9T 2 3 NA18799 2184delA; delF508; 7T/9T 32 4 NA11859 2789 + 5G > A; 7T/7T 34 5 NA07441 3120 + 1G > A; 621 + 1G > T; 7T/9T 37 6 NA11275 3659delC; delF508; 7T/ 9T 22 7 NA07381 3849 + 10KbC > T; delF508; 7T/ 9T 24 8 NA11282 621 + 1G > T; G85E; 7T/9T 26 9 NA11280 711 + 1G > T; 621 + 1G > T; 7T/9T 34 10 NA11290 A455E; 621 + 1G > T; 9T/9T 27 11 NA11277 delI507; 7T/7T 28 12 NA11497 G542X; 7T/ 9T 25 13 NA12785 G551D; R347P; 7T/ 7T 22 14 NA11472 N1303K; 7T/9T 23 15 NA12585 R1162X; 7T/ 7T 24 16 NA13591 R117H; delF508; 5T/ 9T 24 17 NA12960 R334W; 7T/ 7T 24 18 NA11761 R553X; G551D; 7T/ 7T 22 19 NA11284 R560T; delF508; 7T/ 9T 100 20 NA11723 W1282X; 5T/ 7T 100 -
TABLE 2 MMQCI controls RM002182: RM002183: RM002180: RM002181: Control Control Control Control C_CF.HET1 D_CF.HET2 A_CF.MUT1 B_CF.MUT2 1717 − 1G > A DeltaI507 1717 − 1G > A DeltaI507 1898 + 1G > A R553X 1898 + 1G > A R553X 2184delA R117H 2184delA* R117H 2789 + 5G > A 2789 + 5G > A 3120 + 1G > A 3120 + 1G > A 3659delC 3659delC 3849 + 10KbC > 3849 + 10KbC > T T 621 + 1G > T 621 + 1G > T 711 + 1G > T 711 + 1G > T A455E A455E* delF508 delF508 G542X G542X G551D G551D G85E G85E N1303K N1303K R1162X R1162X R334W R334W R347P R347P R560T R560T W1282X W1282X *Indeterminate scores and/or HET calls are expected for the 2184delA and A455E MUT controls -
TABLE 3 Three wild-type and three heterozygous patient samples used. Sample ID Expected Genotype Concentration (ng/uL) MG-700623426 R117H HET (7T/7T) 22.37 AM-717863126 delF508 HET 43.82 BH-725923126 G542X HET 16.65 MW-39031926 WT 19.84 RH-95123626 WT 29.2 AS-88591326 WT 20.02 -
TABLE 4 Lots used in EI validation protocol. Cartridge lot (KT020657) Mfg. Date Recorded failure modes # Cartrs. Group 51327024 Sep. 1, 2010 1717 − 1G > A low signal, 1717 − 1G > A 16 Baseline 1indeterminate scores 51399824 Jul. 6, 2011 1898 + 1G > A/621 + 1G > T/ W1282X 40 Baseline 1indeterminate scores due to score shifting 51356860 Aug. 6, 2011 1898 + 1G > A/W1282X indeterminate scores 16 Baseline 1due to score shifting 51521135 Aug. 31, 2011 R334W false HET due to score shifting 24 Baseline 251414271 Sep. 8, 2011 3120 + 1G > A/3659delC indeterminate 32 Baseline 2scores due to score shifting 51526996 Oct. 10, 2011 2184delA indeterminate score due to 16 Baseline 2score shifting 51554366 Jun. 15, 2012 1717 − 1G > A low signal 36 Recently Mfg. 1 51589222 Jul. 9, 2012 N/A 36 Recently Mfg. 2 - Samples were run using two different software protocols: 1) the current Genmark Dx CF protocol: CF on XT-8 IVD; and 2) Assay software incorporating electrode initialization (−150 to +750 mV in 5 s): CF on XT-8 IVD (10)
- Implementation of electrode initialization through the proposed software update did not change any physical characteristic of the product or the recommended concentration of input DNA. The acceptable range of DNA input into the assay (2-100 ng/ul) is due to limitations of PCR amplification, which will not be impacted by the software update. However, two Coriell samples were used at 2 ng/ul and two were used at 100 ng/ul to demonstrate that the expected results were observed with DNA inputs at the high and low end of the acceptable range.
- EI sought to address 2184delA discordant calls in a CF assay. The CF assay was affected by three unique failure modes, which in some cases can generate miscalls. The three failure modes are 1) EO shifting, 2) Score shifting, and 3) Low signal miscalls.
- E0 shifting—Due to variations in the reference electrode, the potential at which the ferrocene label oxidizes is shifted, resulting in a poor fit of the signal trace by the assay software. This results in no calls and, in some cases, miscalls.
- Score shifting—Due to the presence of non-specific label which settles near the surface of the gold electrodes, the score (WT:MT signal) is shifted closer to an indeterminate boundary of the assay's calling parameters. This results in no calls and, in some cases, miscalls.
- Low signal miscalls—Due to a poorly processed sample, signal can be generated which barely exceeds signal threshold, but is incorrectly fit due to the shape of the signal trace. This results in no calls and, in some cases, miscalls.
- Material prone to the error modes outlined above (baseline lots) was tested to determine if the error modes are resolved when electrode initialization is utilized. Material less prone to the error modes outlined above (recently manufactured lots) was tested to ensure that expected wild-type, mutant, and heterozygote genotype calls are made with electrode initialization.
- Samples were prepared as follows: MMQCI control samples were obtained from inventory and are ready for use in amplification. The majority of the Coriell control samples were diluted 1:10 in molecular grade water from the stock solutions (final concentration of ˜25 ng/ul). Two Coriell samples were run at 2 ng/ul and two were run at 100 ng/ul to cover the recommended range of DNA input into the assay.
- Thirty-two (32) samples were processed using the four (4) lots of cartridges outlined in Table 4. One negative control (DCM) sample was included, which contained water rather than input DNA. Baseline lots were processed using both the current software protocol, CF on XT-8 IVD, as well as CF assay software incorporating electrode initialization (−150 to +750 mV in 5 s), CF on XT-8 IVD. Recently manufactured lots were processed using only the CF assay software incorporating electrode initialization, CF on XT-8 IVD. The sample previously demonstrated to result in a high level of 1717-1G>A low signal errors was be run in quadruplicate, while all other samples were run as a single test for a total of 216 tests.
- E0 stability—Initialization reduced E0 by 0.005V in N330 and by 0.006V in QW56 (
FIG. 5 ). The differences were both significant, p<0.00001 by 2 sample t-test. - Score shift—Initialization reduced background nonspecific QW56 signal by 15% (
FIG. 6 ). The difference is significant, p<0.001 by 2 sample t-test. - Low signal traces—No false hets with 1717 low (degraded) samples were observed (
FIGS. 7, 8, and 9 ). InFIG. 7 , initialization visually reduces a “5th bump” in the 4th harmonic signal. Similarly, inFIGS. 8 and 9 , initialization visually reduced a “5th bump” in the 4th harmonic signal, which leads to false het calls in a sample previously demonstrated to result in a high level of 1717-1G>A signal calls. Tables 5-8 summarize the sample results. -
TABLE 5 Summary of patient sample results. Reported CF Mutation Patient Known CF Initialization Sample Het Mutation Old Protocol Protocol 1 R117H HET 3120 + aG > A indet, 3659delC indet, ✓ 3849 + 10kbC > T indet 2 delF508 HET 621 + 1G > T indet, R117H indet ✓ 3 G542X HET ✓ ✓ 4 WT 3120 + 1G > A indet ✓ 5 WT 3659delC indet, 3849 + 10kbC > T contradictory, ✓ 711 + 1G > T contradictory 6 WT ✓ ✓ -
TABLE 6 Summary of MMQCI control sample results. MMQCI Reported CF Mutation Control Known CF Initialization Sample Het Mutation Old Protocol Protocol 1 WT 3120 + 1G > A indet, 3659delC ✓ indet, 3849 + 10kbC > T indet 2 HET for all detected ✓ ✓ mutations except: delI507, R553X, R117H 3 delI507 HET, R553X HET, 3120 + 1G > A contradictory ✓ R117H HET 4 MUT for all detected ✓ ✓ mutations except: delI507, R553X, R117H 5 delta 507 MUT, R553X 5/7/9T indet ✓ MUT, R117H MUT -
TABLE 7 Summary of Coriell control sample results. Coriell Control Known CF Initialization Sample Het Mutation Old Protocol Protocol 1 1717 − 1G > A; 7T/7T 3894 + 10KbC > T indet ✓ 2 1898 + 1G > A; delF508; 7T/9T ✓ ✓ 3 2184delA; delF508; 7T/9T 3894 + 10KbC > T indet ✓ 4 2789 + 5G > A; 7T/7T 1898 + 1G > A indet OR 3659 DelC indet, 3849 + 10KbC > T indet ✓ 5 3120 + 1G > A; 621 + 1G > T; 7T/9T 3659delC indet ✓ 6 3659delC; delF508; 7T/9T 3120 + 1G > A HET, 3849 + 10KbC > T HET ✓ 7 3849 + 10KbC > T; delF508; 3659delC indet AND/OR 3120 + 1G > A indet ✓ 7T/9T 8 621 + 1G > T; G85E; 7T/9T 3659delC indet AND 3849 + 10kbC > T indet ✓ 9 711 + 1G > T; 621 + 1G > T; 7T/9T 711 + 1G > T HET; 621 + 1G > T HET; 3659delC HET ✓ 10 A455E; 621 + 1G > T; 9T/9T 3659delC indet ✓ 11 delI507; 7T/7T 3659delC indet ✓ 12 G542X; 7T/9T ✓ ✓ 13 G551D; R347P; 7T/7T ✓ ✓ 14 N1303K; 7T/9T 1898 + 1G > A indet ✓ 15 R1162X; 7T/7T A455E contradictory ✓ 16 R117H; delF508; 5T/9T 3659delC indet ✓ 17 R334W; 7T/7T R560T HET; delF508 HET; 3659delC HET; 7T/9T ✓ 18 R553X; G551D; 7T/7T ✓ ✓ 19 R560T; delF508; 7T/9T R560T HET; delF508 HET; 3659delC HET; 7T/9T ✓ 20 W1282X; 5T/7T 3659delC indet, 1898 + 1G > A indet ✓ -
TABLE 8 Demonstrates failure rate of EI protocol to 0.01% Total NSB/E0 Field Complaint Date Kits Failure Lot QC Date Protocol Range Shipped NSB E0 Rate 51589255- Apr. 12, 2012- CF (10) Oct. 26, 2012- 44 1 0 0.09% 51554348- Jun. 27, 2012 Jan. 3, 2013 51589254- (only 51653007) 51527012 51653007 51554100- Apr. 17, 2012 CF (10) Oct. 26, 2012- 15 0 0 0.00% 51651799 Jan. 3, 2013 (only 51651799) 51589504 Sep. 5, 2012 CF (10) Sep. 27, 2012- 29 0 0 0.00% Dec. 14, 2012 51554098 Oct. 18, 2012 CF (10) Nov. 26, 2012- 22 0 0 0.00% Dec. 7, 2012 51554408 Oct. 29, 2012 CF (10) Nov. 28, 2012- 81 0 0 0.00% Jan. 9, 2013 51589506 Nov. 20, 2012 CF (10) Dec. 20, 2012- 53 0 0 0.00% Jan. 11, 2013 51589312 Dec. 27, 2012 CF (10) N/ A 40 0 0 0.00% Totals 284 1 0 0.01% Protocol Results - Electrode Initialization (EI) was tested at different initialization time periods using the markers FLUA, MS2, RSVB, FluA H1, and ADVC at 0.5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 5 seconds.
FIGS. 10 and 12 show that an initialization scan results in increased signal using the initialization time periods indicated. Furthermore,FIGS. 11 and 13 show that an initialization scan results in decreased noise using each of the initialization time periods indicated. - EI was further tested at different initialization time periods was tested. Initialization scans were test at 0, 2, 5, and 10 seconds using MS2 signals as a control.
FIG. 14 shows that background signals decreased using EI.FIG. 15 shows that MS2 positive signals decreased slightly with EI. However,FIG. 16 demonstrates that the overall signal to noise ratio increased significantly following an initialization scan. - The example set forth above are provided to give those of ordinary skill in the art a complete disclosure and description of how to make and use the embodiments of the compositions, systems and methods of the disclosure, and are not intended to limit the scope of what the inventors regard as their disclosure. Modifications of the above-described modes for carrying out the disclosure that are obvious to persons of skill in the art are intended to be within the scope of the following claims. All patents and publications mentioned in the specification are indicative of the levels of skill of those skilled in the art to which the disclosure pertains. All references cited in this disclosure are incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each reference had been incorporated by reference in its entirety individually.
Claims (21)
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US15/857,427 US20180180605A1 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2017-12-28 | Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers |
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US201361798260P | 2013-03-15 | 2013-03-15 | |
US14/218,615 US9891215B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2014-03-18 | Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers |
US15/857,427 US20180180605A1 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2017-12-28 | Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US14/218,615 Continuation US9891215B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2014-03-18 | Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20180180605A1 true US20180180605A1 (en) | 2018-06-28 |
Family
ID=51789714
Family Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US14/218,615 Active US9891215B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2014-03-18 | Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers |
US15/857,427 Abandoned US20180180605A1 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2017-12-28 | Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers |
Family Applications Before (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US14/218,615 Active US9891215B2 (en) | 2013-03-15 | 2014-03-18 | Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US9891215B2 (en) |
Families Citing this family (9)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US9891215B2 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2018-02-13 | Genmark Diagnostics, Inc. | Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers |
US20160178562A1 (en) * | 2014-12-19 | 2016-06-23 | Ohmx Corporation | Competitive enzymatic assay |
US20190062809A1 (en) | 2017-08-24 | 2019-02-28 | Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. (dba GenMark Diagnostics, Inc.) | Electrochemical detection of bacterial and/or fungal infections |
EP3676605A4 (en) | 2017-08-30 | 2021-06-02 | Neolight LLC | System and methods for bilirubin analysis |
US10935561B2 (en) | 2018-06-01 | 2021-03-02 | Genmark Diagnostics, Inc. | Integrated diagnostic instrument |
US10948450B2 (en) | 2018-07-23 | 2021-03-16 | Genmark Diagnostics, Inc. | Electrochemical measurements of components in coatings |
US11782013B2 (en) * | 2018-08-08 | 2023-10-10 | University Of Central Florida Research Foundation, Inc. | Sensor device with biopolymer-metal composite film and related methods |
EP4536852A1 (en) | 2022-06-07 | 2025-04-16 | F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG | Ferrocene labelled primers for electrochemical detection |
WO2024235904A1 (en) | 2023-05-16 | 2024-11-21 | Roche Molecular Systems, Inc. | Detection of target analytes using multimodal signal probes |
Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20080202927A1 (en) * | 2000-11-03 | 2008-08-28 | Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. | Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing |
US9891215B2 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2018-02-13 | Genmark Diagnostics, Inc. | Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers |
Family Cites Families (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5776672A (en) * | 1990-09-28 | 1998-07-07 | Kabushiki Kaisha Toshiba | Gene detection method |
US7172864B1 (en) * | 1993-11-01 | 2007-02-06 | Nanogen | Methods for electronically-controlled enzymatic reactions |
AU5920696A (en) * | 1995-05-18 | 1996-11-29 | Igen, Inc. | Method for derivitizing electrodes and assay methods using s uch derivitized electrodes |
US7393645B2 (en) * | 1996-11-05 | 2008-07-01 | Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. | Compositions for the electronic detection of analytes utilizing monolayers |
US20020177135A1 (en) | 1999-07-27 | 2002-11-28 | Doung Hau H. | Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing |
KR100475312B1 (en) * | 2002-12-10 | 2005-03-10 | 한국전자통신연구원 | Chips for detecting DNA and method for detecting DNA using them |
WO2005103652A1 (en) * | 2004-04-21 | 2005-11-03 | Ausbiochip Pty Ltd | Optoelectronic biochip |
-
2014
- 2014-03-18 US US14/218,615 patent/US9891215B2/en active Active
-
2017
- 2017-12-28 US US15/857,427 patent/US20180180605A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20080202927A1 (en) * | 2000-11-03 | 2008-08-28 | Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. | Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing |
US9891215B2 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2018-02-13 | Genmark Diagnostics, Inc. | Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers |
Non-Patent Citations (2)
Title |
---|
Palek et al, Anal. Chem., vol. 73, pages 74A-83A (2001). * |
Seiwart et al, Anal. Bioanal. Chem., vol. 390, pages 181-200 (2008). * |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
US9891215B2 (en) | 2018-02-13 |
US20140323326A1 (en) | 2014-10-30 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20180180605A1 (en) | Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers | |
US9874542B2 (en) | Signal detection techniques for the detection of analytes | |
US7312087B2 (en) | Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing | |
US6541617B1 (en) | Detection of target analytes using particles and electrodes | |
US6290839B1 (en) | Systems for electrophoretic transport and detection of analytes | |
US6753143B2 (en) | Target analyte detection using asymmetrical self-assembled monolayers | |
US20020177135A1 (en) | Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing | |
US7087148B1 (en) | Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes | |
AU768546B2 (en) | Signal detection techniques for the detection of analytes | |
US20140087374A1 (en) | The Use of Microfluidic Systems in the Electrochemical Detection of Target Analytes | |
US20050003399A1 (en) | Binding acceleration techniques for the detection of analytes | |
US20080202927A1 (en) | Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing | |
WO2001054813A2 (en) | Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing | |
US6833267B1 (en) | Tissue collection devices containing biosensors | |
AU3128200A (en) | Tissue collection devices containing biosensors | |
US20140305811A1 (en) | Methods for the electrochemical treatment of self-assembled monolayers | |
AU2004203183B2 (en) | A method of analyzing biochips | |
AU772250B2 (en) | Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: ROCHE MOLECULAR SYSTEMS, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:GENMARK DIAGNOSTICS, INC.;REEL/FRAME:058189/0563 Effective date: 20210910 |